Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptor
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
YSP-3000
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2007 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WK75380
YSP-3000
Digital Sound Projector
TM
OWNER’S MANUAL
UA
00cv_YSP-3000_UA.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 2, 2007 11:19 AM
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
i En
■ Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert you to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert you to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
1
Read these instructions.
2 Keep these instructions.
3 Heed all warnings.
4 Follow all instructions.
5 Do not use this apparatus near water.
6 Clean only with dry cloth.
7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions.
8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that
produce heat.
9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-
type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than
the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third
grounding prong. The wide
blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the
provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician
for replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table specified by the manufacturer, or
sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used,
use caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning
storms or when unused for long periods of time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is
required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such
as power supply cable or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled
or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been
exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has
been dropped.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ii En
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions
contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.
Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void
your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT:
When connecting this product to accessories and/or another
product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied
with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation
instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the
requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”
digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a
residential environment will not result in harmful interference
with other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not
installed and used according to the instructions found in the
users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation
of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is
found to be the source of interference, which can be determined
by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected
by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change
the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type
of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please
contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe
Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed
by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying
blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.
Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries
Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT.
iii En
1
To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place with at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above (or below) this unit
– away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust,
moisture, and/or cold.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or
transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold
to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high
humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation
inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this
unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage
to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this
unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc.
in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside
this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or
personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are
complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly
causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power supply cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage
the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit
with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not
be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit
with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power supply cable
disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning
storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed.
The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.
vacation), disconnect the power supply cable from the wall
outlet.
16 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in
standby mode, and disconnect the power supply cable from the
wall outlet.
18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature
changes suddenly. Disconnect the power supply cable from the
outlet, then leave the unit alone.
19 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm.
Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling.
20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug
can be reached easily.
21 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or the like.
Caution: Read this before operating this unit.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO
NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
WARNING
THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE OF THIS UNIT MUST BE
CONNECTED TO THE MAIN SOCKET OUTLET VIA A
PROTECTIVE EARTHING CONNECTION.
2
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as
it is connected to the AC wall outlet, even if this unit itself is
turned off by STANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby
mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this
Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot
and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
FOR U.K. CUSTOMERS
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug
supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an
appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions
described below. Note that the plug severed from the mains lead
must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous
if engaged in a live socket outlet.
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may
not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the
terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Make
sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three
pin plug.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type.
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
SETUP
English
1 En
Overview ................................................................. 2
Features .................................................................. 3
Using this manual .................................................. 5
Supplied accessories .............................................. 6
Controls and functions .......................................... 7
Front panel ................................................................ 7
Front panel display ................................................... 8
Rear panel ................................................................. 9
Remote control
(Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models) ..... 10
Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models) ......... 13
Installation ............................................................ 16
Before installing this unit ........................................ 16
Installing this unit ................................................... 16
Connections .......................................................... 19
Before connecting components ............................... 20
Connections using HDMI cables ............................ 21
Connecting a TV ..................................................... 22
Connecting a DVD player/recorder ........................ 23
Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner
............................................................................. 24
Connecting a digital airwave tuner ......................... 25
Connecting a portable audio player ........................ 26
Connecting other external components .................. 27
Connecting a subwoofer ......................................... 28
Connecting the FM antenna .................................... 29
About the IR IN terminal
(U.S.A. and Canada models only) ...................... 29
Connecting the AC power supply cable ................. 29
Getting started ..................................................... 30
Installing batteries in the remote control ................ 30
Operation range of the remote control .................... 30
Turning on this unit or setting it to
the standby mode ................................................ 31
Using SET MENU ................................................ 32
Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) ................ 32
The flow chart of SET MENU ................................ 33
Changing OSD language ..................................... 34
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) .............................. 35
The flow chart of AUTO SETUP ........................... 35
Installing the IntelliBeam microphone ................... 36
Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ....................... 37
Using the system memory ................................... 42
Convenient usage of the system memory ............... 42
Saving settings ........................................................ 42
Loading settings ...................................................... 43
Playback ............................................................... 45
Selecting the input source ....................................... 45
Playing back sources ............................................... 46
Adjusting the volume .............................................. 47
FM tuning ............................................................. 48
FM controls and functions ...................................... 48
Automatic tuning .................................................... 49
Manual tuning ......................................................... 49
Automatic preset tuning .......................................... 50
Manual preset tuning .............................................. 51
Selecting a preset station ........................................ 52
Displaying the Radio Data System information
(Europe model only) ........................................... 52
Enjoying surround sound ....................................54
5 Beam .................................................................... 54
Stereo plus 3 Beam ................................................. 55
3 Beam .................................................................... 55
My Surround ........................................................... 55
Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound ...... 57
Enjoying TV in surround sound ............................. 58
Adjusting surround mode parameters ..................... 59
Enjoying stereo sound ..........................................60
2-channel stereo playback ....................................... 60
5-channel stereo playback ....................................... 60
Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) ..............61
Using auto-adjust function ...................................... 61
Using manual-adjust function ................................. 62
Using sound field programs .................................63
CINEMA DSP programs ........................................ 64
Using the music enhancer ....................................66
Using the volume mode
(Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode)
67
Using the sleep timer ............................................68
Displaying the input source information ............70
Using the HDMI control feature .........................71
MANUAL SETUP ................................................72
Using MANUAL SETUP ....................................... 73
BEAM MENU ........................................................ 74
SOUND MENU ...................................................... 78
INPUT MENU ........................................................ 80
DISPLAY MENU ................................................... 83
Adjusting the audio balance ................................84
Using the test tone .................................................. 84
Using the audio output being played back .............. 85
Selecting the input mode ......................................87
Adjusting the system parameters .......................88
Using the system parameters .................................. 88
Setting the MEMORY PROTECT ......................... 89
Setting the MAX VOLUME ................................... 90
Setting the TURN ON VOLUME .......................... 90
Setting the DEMO MODE ..................................... 91
Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY ........................... 92
Disabling the front panel keys ................................ 93
Setting the FACTORY PRESET ............................ 94
Remote control features .......................................96
Setting remote control codes .................................. 96
Controlling other components ................................ 97
Using the TV macro ............................................. 100
Troubleshooting ..................................................102
Glossary ...............................................................105
Index ....................................................................107
Specifications ......................................................108
List of remote control codes...........................................i
Contents
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
SETUP
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Overview
2 En
It is generally accepted that in order to fully enjoy the benefits of surround sound at home, you must endure the agony of
wiring and installing a great number of speakers in the hope that your listening room will give you the same kind of
surround sound experience as your local movie theater.
Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector challenges this preconception that complicated speaker setup and
troublesome wiring go hand-in-hand with the enjoyment of multi-channel surround sound.
This slimline unit does away with the need for complicated wiring and installation worries, leaving you with a unit that is
not only easy to set up, but is also capable of reproducing the kind of powerful surround sound you have been waiting for
from its built-in 2 woofers and 21 full-range small speakers.
You can fine-tune the parameters of this unit to adjust the delay time for separate sound beams, resulting in highly
directional sound that comes in on the listening position from all directions.
The YSP-3000 projects sound beams containing surround sound information for the front right (R), front left (L),
surround right (SR), and surround left (SL) speaker positions, which are reflected off the walls of your listening room
before reaching the actual listening position. With the addition of center (C) sound beams, this Digital Sound Projector
creates true-to-life 5.1-channel surround sound that makes you feel as if there are actual speakers around the room.
Sit back and enjoy the real sound experience of this simple, yet stylish Digital Sound Projector.
Overview
SL
SR
R
L
C
Listening position
Imaginary
surround left
speaker
Imaginary
surround right
speaker
Imaginary
front left
speaker
Imaginary
front right
speaker
Imaginary
center
speaker
Features
3 En
INTRODUCTION
English
Digital Sound Projector™
The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim
unit to control and steer multiple channels of sound to
generate multi-channel surround sound, thus eliminates
the need for satellite loudspeakers and cabling normally
associated with conventional surround sound systems.
This unit also employs the beam modes that let you enjoy
the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam,
and My Surround), 2-channel and 5-channel stereo
playback, and My Beam.
My Surround
In addition to the above mentioned beam modes, this unit
is equipped with My Surround beam mode that allows you
to enjoy surround system even in a small listening area.
My Surround is a function integrated and optimized with
DiMAGIC’s Euphony technology and Yamaha’s Beam
reproduction system.
My Beam
This unit employs My Beam that ensures a clear sound in
a noisy environment. You can adjust the beam angle
manually or automatically using the supplied remote
control to the maximum of 45°, rightward and leftward.
Cinema DSP
This unit employs the Cinema DSP technology developed
by Yamaha Electronics Corp. that lets you experience
movies at home with all the original dramatic sound
impact.
HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced, or high-definition
video (including 1080p video signal transmission) as well as
multi-channel digital audio based on HDCP
◆ Simple and easy connections with HDMI supported external
components
◆ Functional link with an HDMI control-compatible TV
Versatile Remote Control
The supplied remote control comes with preset remote
control codes used to control the DVD player, VCR, cable
TV tuner, and digital satellite tuner connected to this unit.
In addition, the remote control is equipped with the macro
capability that enables a series of operations with the press
of a single button.
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic
optimization technology with the aid of the supplied
IntelliBeam microphone. You can avoid troublesome
listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate
sound beam adjustments that best match your listening
environment.
Compatibility with the Newest Technologies
This unit employs decoders compatible with Dolby
Digital, DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, DTS
Neo:6, Music Enhancer, and Neural Surround.
◆ Dolby Digital
This is the standard audio signal format used on various
digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This
surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up
to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more
realistic effect.
◆ DTS
This is the standard audio signal format used on various
digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This
surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up
to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more
realistic effect.
◆ Dolby Pro Logic
This sophisticated, matrix decoding technology up-converts
any 2-channel source audio to a 5.1-channel full bandwidth
playback, resulting in a surround sound experience.
◆ Dolby Pro Logic II
This is a redesigned version of Dolby Pro Logic that employs
2 stereo surround channels, a subwoofer, and a greatly
enhanced steering logic. This improved technology provides
an exceptionally stable sound field that simulates 5.1 to a
much greater degree than the original Dolby Pro Logic.
◆ DTS Neo:6
This technology decodes the conventional 2-channel sources
for 6-channel playback, enabling playback with the full-range
channels with higher separation. Music mode and Cinema
mode are available to play back music and movie sources
respectively.
◆ Music Enhancer to restore the original depth and width of
compression artifacts such as the MP3 format.
◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A and Canada models only)
Sophisticated FM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Radio Data System capability (Europe model only)
XM™ Satellite Radio
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the XM Mini-
Tuner Dock, and Antenna sold separately by XM Satellite
Radio)
◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the XM HD content of
XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in
a full surround sound experience
◆ XM Satellite Radio information displaying capability
iPod™ Controlling Capability
(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod
(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini
◆ Playback information displaying capability
◆ Battery charging capability
Features
Features
4 En
The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of
YAMAHA Corporation.
The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered
trademarks of YAMAHA Corporation.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS” and “Neo:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
Manufactured under license from 1 Ltd. Worldwide patents
applied for.
The “ ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector
™
” are trademarks
of 1 Ltd.
TruBass, SRS and the “ ” symbol are registered trademarks
of SRS Labs, Inc. TruBass technology is incorporated under
license from SRS Labs, Inc.
™
is a trademark of DiMAGIC Co., Ltd.
Using this manual
5 En
INTRODUCTION
English
• This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the
supplied owner’s manual for each component.
• Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified.
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In
case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority.
1 Install this unit in your listening room.
See “Installation” on page 16.
2 Connect this unit to your TV and other external components.
See “Connections” on page 19.
3 Prepare the remote control and turn on the power of this unit.
See “Getting started” on page 30.
4 Run AUTO SETUP.
See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 35.
5 Play back a source.
See “Playback” on page 45.
6 Change the beam modes and/or CINEMA DSP settings.
See “Enjoying surround sound” on page 54.
7 Run MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune settings and/or set remote control codes.
See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72 and “Remote control features” on page 96.
Using this manual
Notes
If you want to make additional settings
and adjustments
Supplied accessories
6 En
Check that you have received all of the following parts.
Supplied accessories
Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit.
Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC
wall outlet. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 19 to 29 in the Owner’s Manual.
YSP-3000
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
C2007 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia
WK75520 [En]
1
2
AUDIO INPUT
OUT
AUX 1
TV/STB
TV/STB
SUBWOOFER
AUX 1
DVD
AUX 2
VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO OUTPUT
L
R
VIDEO
INPUT
ANALOG AUDIO
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
AUDIO OUTPUT
DVD player
TV
Decide where to install this unit.
Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired
surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner.
YSP-3000
Connecting external components to this unit
Installing this unit
This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the
surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Install this unit using a rack, etc.
Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before
installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first. In case you
install this unit on top of a rack, etc., use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit.
For further information on installation, see page 16 in the Owner’s Manual.
Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is
measured from the left and right corners.
Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the
adjacent walls.
40˚ to 50˚
An object, such as furniture An object, such as furniture
To the AC wall
outlet
132
Pull out the cap
before connecting
the optical cable,
and then check the
direction to insert the
cable.
Do not plug the power
supply cable into an AC
wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
1
2
Items used for connections and operations
in this guide
s
Audio pin cable (x1)
s
OSD* video pin cable (x1)
s
Optical cable (x1)
s
Digital audio pin cable (x1)
s
IntelliBeam microphone (x1)
s
Cardboard microphone stand (x1)
s
Demonstration DVD (x1)
*OSD: On-Screen Display
Connection
example 1
1. Pull out the cap
2. Check the direction
If you have connected external components,
follow the steps on the backside to start the
AUTO SETUP procedure.
Continued
on the back
Front left channel
Center channel
Front right channel
Surround left channel
Surround right channel
Front left channel
Center channel
Front right channel
Surround left channel
Surround right channel
This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to
this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the
analog/digital audio from the TV. Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video
connection between your DVD player and TV.
1
2
VIDEO
INPUT
HDMI
INPUT
HDMI
OUTPUT
HDMI
OUT
IN
DVD
AUX 1
AUDIO INPUT
OUT
AUX 1
TV/STB
TV/STB
SUBWOOFER
AUX 1
DVD
AUX 2
VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL
1
To the AC wall
outlet
Connect cables in the following order.
3
Install this unit in the
rack.
1
Place this unit in front of
the rack.
This connection example shows a way to make the most of the capability of this unit. You can
enjoy DVD audio and video with higher quality via the HDMI cable. In case your TV does not have
a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner, connect a digital satellite
tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner via the HDMI cable. For details, see “Connections
using HDMI cables” on page 21 in the Owner’s manual.
Connection
example 2
DVD player
TV
YSP-3000
Do not plug the power
supply cable into an AC
wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
If you have connected external components,
follow the steps on the backside to start the
AUTO SETUP procedure.
Continued
on the back
Supplied Sold separately
Connect cables in the following order.
1 OSD video pin cable
(Displaysthe YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV)
2 HDMI cable
(Displaysthe DVD digital video on the TV)
3 HDMI cable
(InputsDVD digital audio/video signals to this unit)
2
(Sold separately)
3
(Sold separately)
2
Place this unit upside
down and connect this unit to
your TV and DVD player.
y Hint
•To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor.
•You can also use the optional metal wall bracket (sold separately) to mount this unit on the wall. For details, refer to the instructions
supplied with the metal wall bracket.
Note
Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack.
Video connection
Supplied
1Audio pin cable
(OutputsTV analog audio sounds from this unit)
2 OSD video pin cable
(Displaysthe YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV)
3 Optical cable
(Outputs
TV digital audio sounds from this unit)
4 Digital audio pin cable
(OutputsDVD digital audio sounds from this unit)
*
The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. They
are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit.
4
4
Installation is completed.
The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack. To prevent this unit or the floor from being scratched, we recommend putting a piece of
cloth on the floor in step 2.
y Hint
Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD
player is turned on.
y Hint
•If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible TV
(except some models) via HDMI, you can use the remote
control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power,
select the audio output component, and adjust the volume
level of this unit.
•Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD
player is turned on.
*
The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help youfind them easily. They
are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit.
Digital satellite tuner/Cable TV tuner/
Digital airwave tuner
Audio connection
Audio connection
HDMI connection
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Optical cable
STEREO MY SUR.
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
SUR. DECODE
OFF
CODE SET
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
YSP
TV/AV
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
+10
0
78
9
5
AV
Remote control (×1)
Batteries (×2)
(AA, R6, UM-3)
OSD* video pin cable (×1)
IntelliBeam microphone
(×1)
Fasteners (×4)
Audio pin cable (×1)
Digital audio pin cable (×1)
Optical cable (×1)
Cable clamp (×1)
Cardboard microphone
stand (×1)
(Orange)
(White/Red)
(Yellow)
Indoor FM antenna (×1)
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Demonstration DVD
(×1)
YSP-3000
Digital Sound Projector
TM
Reference Guide for iPod/XM Radio
This is the Reference Guide for Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector. This guide explains the connections and
operations of iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). Operations in this guide use keys on the
supplied remote control unless otherwise specified. For general information including the controls and functions of this
unit, refer to the owner’s manual.
y
The illustrations used in this Reference Guide are for U.S.A. and Canada models only.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
Neural Surround
™
name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation.
Using iPod™........................................................................................................................................ 2
Connection................................................................................................................................................. 2
Controlling iPod™ ....................................................................................................................................2
XM Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)........................................................ 5
Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock................................................................................................. 5
Activating XM Satellite Radio.................................................................................................................. 6
Basic XM Satellite Radio operations........................................................................................................ 6
Presetting the XM Satellite Radio channels.............................................................................................. 9
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...................................................................................... 10
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................ 11
Overview
Contents
iPod
TM
UA
REFERENCE GUIDE
(iPod/XM Radio) (×1)
QUICK REFERENCE
GUIDE
(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia
models only)
* The number of provided languages
varies depending on the sales area.
*OSD: On-Screen Display
Controls and functions
7 En
INTRODUCTION
English
1 AUX 3 input jack
Connect your portable audio player (see page 26).
2 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack
Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO
SETUP (see page 36).
3 Remote control sensor
Receives infrared signals from the remote control.
4 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
5 INPUT
Press repeatedly to switch between input sources (see
page 45).
Outputs a test tone to experience the sound beam (see
page 91).
6 VOLUME +/–
Controls the volume level of all audio channels (see
page 47).
7 STANDBY/ON
Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby
mode (see page 31).
• When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click sound
followed by the 4 to 5-second interval before sound
reproducing.
• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control or to search for HDMI signals.
Controls and functions
Front panel
3 4
5
6
STANDBY/ON
VOLUME
+
INPUT
7
INTELLIBEAM MIC
AUX 3
21
Notes
Controls and functions
8 En
1 HDMI indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is
input at the HDMI IN jack(s).
2 TUNER indicators
FM: Light up when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast.
XM: MEMORY flashes during the XM preset operation
(U.S.A. and Canada models only).
3 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when a sound field program is selected (see
page 64).
4 PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
5 Decoder indicators
Light up when the corresponding decoder operates
(see page 56).
The neural decoder is available for the U.S.A. and Canada models
only.
6 ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Music Enhancer is selected (see
page 66).
7 Volume level indicator
Displays the current volume level.
8 DOCK indicator
(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)
Lights up when your iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano,
or iPod mini is connected to this unit via the DOCK
terminal on this unit.
9 SRS TruBass indicator
Lights up when TruBass is turned on (see page 79).
0 EQUAL indicator
Lights up when the TV volume equal mode is selected
(see page 67).
A NIGHT indicator
Lights up when one of the night listening enhancers is
selected (see page 67).
B SLEEP indicator
Lights up when the sleep timer is set (see page 68).
C Radio Data System indicators
(Europe model only)
Show the current Radio Data System status.
D XM indicator
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Lights up when XM is selected as the input source.
E Multi-information display
Shows information with alphanumeric characters when
you adjust the parameters of this unit.
F Input channel indicators
Show information when you adjust the parameters of this
unit. The channel component of the current digital input
signal is displayed (see page 56).
y
You can adjust the brightness and display setting of the front
panel display using the F.DISPLAY SET parameter in MANUAL
SETUP (see page 83).
Front panel display
1
89
0
23
4
67
5
AB C D
EF
Note
Controls and functions
9 En
INTRODUCTION
English
The illustration below shows the rear panel of the U.S.A. and Canada models.
1 ANTENNA jack
Connect the FM antenna (see page 29).
2 DOCK terminal
(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)
Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-
10, sold separately) (see page 2 in the Reference Guide).
3 AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks
Connect an external component via an analog connection
(see page 23).
4 TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks
Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner
via an analog connection (see pages 22 and 24).
5 VIDEO OUT jack
Connect to the video input jack of your TV to display the
OSD of this unit (see page 22).
6 SUBWOOFER OUT jack
Connect your subwoofer (see page 28).
7 AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack
Connect an external component via a coaxial digital
connection (see page 27).
8 AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack
Connect an external component via an optical digital
connection (see page 27).
9 TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack
Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner
via an optical digital connection (see pages 22 and 24).
0 DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack
Connect your DVD player via a coaxial digital connection
(see page 23).
A XM antenna jack
(U.S.A and Canada models only)
Connect your XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately)
(see page 5 in the Reference Guide).
B IR IN terminal
(U.S.A and Canada models only)
This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use
only (see page 29).
C AUX 1 HDMI IN jack
Connect your digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital
air wave tuner, or game console via an HDMI connection
(see page 21).
D DVD HDMI IN jack
Connect your DVD player via an HDMI connection (see
page 21).
E HDMI OUT jack
Connect to the HDMI IN jack on your HDMI component
such as a TV or a projector connected to this unit (see
page 21).
F AC power supply cable
Connect to the AC wall outlet (see page 29).
Rear panel
DIGITAL INPUTOUT
TV/STB
DVD
SUBWOOFER
IR INXM
AUX 1
DVD
IN
OUT
HDMI
TV/STB
AUX 1 AUX 1
AUX 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
DOCK
AUDIO INPUTANTENNA
8
90
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
F
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Controls and functions
10 En
This section describes the functions of the remote control
used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an
asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP
and TV/AV operation modes (S).
y
You can also control other components using the remote control
once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See
“Controlling other components” on page 97 for details.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 STANDBY/ON
Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 31).
3 Transmission indicator
Lights up when infrared control signals are being output.
4 Input selector buttons
Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2,
AUX3, STB, TV, or FM).
5 VOL MODE
Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 67).
6 AUTO SETUP
Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 35).
7 CINEMA DSP program buttons
Select the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 63).
8 ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 66).
9 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER
Select and adjust SET MENU items.
0 DISPLAY
Displays information on the selected input signal.
A VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see
page 47).
B MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to
the previous volume level (see page 47).
C TV INPUT
Toggles between the input sources on the TV (see
page 97).
D CH LEVEL
Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 85).
E TEST
Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each
channel (see page 84).
Remote control (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models)
STEREO
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
SUR. DECODE
OFF
CODE SET
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
A-E
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
YSP
TV/AV
CH
ENTRY
A-E
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
FM
TV
DVD
AUX3
TVAV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
+10
0
78
9
5
MY SUR.
1G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
t
U
V
W
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
D
E
F
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Controls and functions
11 En
INTRODUCTION
English
F DVD player/VCR control buttons
Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 98 and 99).
G My Beam microphone
Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My
Beam auto-adjust function (see page 61).
H TV POWER
Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby
mode (see page 97).
I AV POWER
Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to
the standby mode (see pages 98 and 99).
J INPUT1
Switches the input source on your TV (see page 97).
K MACRO
Use to set the TV macro (see page 100).
L a/5
Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit
is receiving an FM broadcast (see page 52).
M A-E
Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is
receiving an FM broadcast (see page 52).
N SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 68).
O INPUTMODE
Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and
ANALOG) (see page 87).
P Beam mode buttons
Change the beam mode settings (see pages 54, 60, and
61).
Q SUR. DECODE
Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 57).
R MENU
Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see
pages 37 and 73).
S Operation mode selector
Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when
operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your
TV or other AV components.
T RETURN
Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET
MENU screen.
U TV VOL +/–
Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 97).
V CH +/–
Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner,
cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 97 and 99).
W TV MUTE, CODE SET
Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 97).
Sets up remote control codes (see page 96).
The functions L and M are available only when the FM stations
are preset.
Note
Controls and functions
12 En
This section describes the functions of the remote control
used to control FM, Radio Data System, or iPod when the
TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector
(7). Note that the Radio Data System controls are
available for Europe model only, and the iPod controls are
available for Australia model only.
1 PRESET/TUNE
FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the
frequency search mode (see pages 49 to 52).
2 Numeric buttons
FM: Enter numbers.
3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER
FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station
number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 49 to 52).
Use A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group (A to
E) (see pages 51 and 52). Use ENTER to confirm the input
above.
y
These functions are also available when this unit is receiving the
Radio Data System (see page 52) or playing back your iPod (see
page 3 in the Reference Guide).
4 DISPLAY
Radio Data System and iPod: Displays information when
this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 52)
or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference
Guide).
5 MEMORY
FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 50 and 51).
y
This function is also available when this unit is receiving the
Radio Data System (see page 52).
6 SEARCH
FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see
page 49).
7 Operation mode selector
Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when
operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your
TV or other AV components.
4
6
321
+10
0
78
9
5
STEREO
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
OFF
CODE SET
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
A-E
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
YSP
TV/AV
CH
ENTRY
A-E
AUX1 AUX2
STB
FM
TV
DVD
AUX3
TVAV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
ENTER
SUR. DECODE
MY SUR.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Controls and functions
13 En
INTRODUCTION
English
This section describes the functions of the remote control
used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an
asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP
and TV/AV operation modes (S).
y
You can also control other components using the remote control
once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See
“Controlling other components” on page 97 for details.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 STANDBY/ON
Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 31).
3 Transmission indicator
Lights up when infrared control signals are being output.
4 Input selector buttons
Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2,
AUX3/DOCK, STB, TV, or FM/XM).
5 VOL MODE
Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 67).
6 AUTO SETUP
Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 35).
7 Sound field program buttons
Select the sound field programs (see page 63).
8 ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 66).
9 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER
Select and adjust SET MENU items.
0 DISPLAY
Displays information on the selected input signal.
A VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see
page 47).
B MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to
the previous volume level (see page 47).
C TV INPUT
Toggles between the input source on your TV (see
page 97).
D CH LEVEL
Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 85).
E TEST
Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each
channel (see page 84).
Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models)
STEREO
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
OFF
CODE SET
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
YSP
TV/AV
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
+10
0
78
9
5
AV
MY SUR.
3BEAM
SUR. DECODE
1G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
t
U
V
W
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
D
E
F
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Controls and functions
14 En
F DVD player/VCR control buttons
Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 98 and 99).
G My Beam microphone
Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My
Beam auto-adjust function (see page 61).
H TV POWER
Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby
mode (see page 97).
I AV POWER
Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to
the standby mode (see pages 98 and 99).
J INPUT1
Switches the input source on your TV (see page 97).
K MACRO
Use to set the TV macro (see page 100).
L a/5
Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit
is receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see
page 52).
M CAT
Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is
receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see page 52).
N SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 68).
O INPUTMODE
Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and
ANALOG) (see page 87).
P Beam mode buttons
Change the beam mode settings (see pages 54, 60, and
61).
Q SUR. DECODE
Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 57).
R MENU
Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see
pages 37 and 73).
S Operation mode selector
Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when
operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your
TV or other AV components.
T RETURN
Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET
MENU screen.
U TV VOL +/–
Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 97).
V CH +/–
Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner,
cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 97 and 99).
W TV MUTE, CODE SET
Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 97).
Sets up remote control codes (see page 96).
The functions L and M are available only when the FM/XM
stations are preset.
Note
Controls and functions
15 En
INTRODUCTION
English
This section describes the functions of the remote control
used to control FM, XM Satellite Radio, or iPod when the
TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector
(7).
1 PRESET/TUNE
FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the
frequency search mode (see pages 49 to 52).
2 Numeric buttons
FM, XM: Enter numbers.
3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER
FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station
number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 49 to 52).
Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group
(A to E) (see pages 51 and 52). Use ENTER to confirm the
input above.
XM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to select XM channels in
All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to
select the preset channel number (1 to 8) in Preset Search
mode. Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to select XM categories in
All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to
select the preset channel group (A to E) in Preset Search
mode. Use ENTER to confirm the input above (see pages
7 and 8 in the Reference Guide).
y
These functions are also available when this unit is playing back
your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide).
4 DISPLAY
XM and iPod: Displays information when this unit is
receiving an XM channel (see page 10 in the Reference
Guide) or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the
Reference Guide).
5 MEMORY
FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 50 and 51).
XM: Use to store the preset stations (see page 9 in the
Reference Guide).
6 SEARCH
FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see
page 49).
XM: Switches between search modes (All Channel
Search, Category Search, and Preset Search) (see pages 7
and 8 in the Reference Guide).
7 Operation mode selector
Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when
operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your
TV or other AV components.
4
6
321
+10
0
78
9
5
STEREO
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
OFF
CODE SET
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
AV
YSP
TV/AV
SUR. DECODE
MY SUR.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Installation
16 En
This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a metal wall bracket, a rack or a stand.
Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components can be done before installing this
unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components, including this unit, in order to decide which
procedure should come first. Especially when you make a connection over HDMI, we recommend that you make a
connection first before installation (see page 21).
This unit creates surround sound by reflecting projected
sound beams off the walls of your listening room. The
surround sound effects produced by this unit may not be
sufficient when this unit is installed in the following
locations.
• Rooms with walls inadequate for reflecting sound
beams
• Rooms with acoustically absorbent walls
• Rooms with measurements outside the following
range: W (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) x H (2 to 3.5 m (7 to
11.5 ft)) x D (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft))
• Rooms with less than 1.8 m (6 ft) from the listening
position to this unit
• Rooms where objects such as furniture are likely to
obstruct the path of sound beams
• Rooms where the listening position is close to the walls
• Rooms where the listening position is not in front of
this unit
y
• You can enjoy surround sound by selecting My Surround (see
page 55) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not
fulfill the above conditions (except when the listening position
is not directly facing toward the front of this unit).
• You can also enjoy surround sound by selecting 2-channel or 5-
channel stereo playback (see page 60) or My Beam (see
page 61) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not
fulfill the above conditions.
Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation
space so that heat can escape. Make at least 5 cm (2 in) of
space above or below this unit.
• We do not recommend putting this unit directly on the floor of
your listening room. Please install this unit using a metal wall
bracket, a rack, or a stand.
• This unit weighs 11.5 kg (25 lbs 6 oz). Be sure to install this
unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an
earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children.
• When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this
unit directly above your TV.
• This unit is shielded against magnetic rays. However, if the
picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we
recommend moving this unit away from your TV.
Install this unit where there are no obstacles such as
furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise,
the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved.
You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the
corner.
Parallel installation
Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is
measured from the left and right corners.
Corner installation
Install this unit in the corner at a 40º to 50º angle from the
adjacent walls.
Installation
Before installing this unit
5 cm (2 in) or more
Rear
Front
Side view
Notes
Installing this unit
An object, such as furniture
40° to 50°
An object, such as furniture
17 En
Installation
PREPARATION
English
■ Installation examples
Example 1
Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible.
Example 2
Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls.
Example 3
Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible.
18 En
Installation
■ Using a metal wall bracket
You can use the optional metal wall bracket to mount this
unit on the wall in your listening room.
y
Refer to the instructions supplied with the metal bracket for
details on how to attach the metal bracket to the wall or how to
attach this unit to the metal bracket.
■ Using a stand
You can mount your TV on a stand placed on a
commercially available rack and install this unit under
your TV.
y
Refer to the instructions supplied with the stand for details on
how to install the stand or how to mount and the TV on the stand.
■ Using a rack
You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a
commercially available rack.
Make sure that the rack is large enough to allow adequate
ventilation space around this unit (see page 16) and that it is
strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV.
■ Affixing this unit
Peel off the film from each of the four supplied fasteners
and then secure them to the bottom four corners of this
unit and the top of the rack, etc.
• Do not install this unit on top of a slanted surface. This unit may
fall over and cause injury.
• Make sure you wipe the surface of the rack, etc. before securing
the fasteners. Applying the tape to a dirty or wet surface will
weaken the sticking power of the tape, and this unit may fall as
a result.
92
112
670
4- 7
24- 7x22
65
325 65325
This unit
TV
Metal wall bracket
YSP-3000
SPM-K30 (Option) (mm)
TV
This unit
Stand
Note
Notes
When this unit is installed above your TV
When this unit is installed under your TV
1
2
This unit
Peel off
the film
Fasteners
Connections
19 En
PREPARATION
English
This unit is equipped with the following types of audio/video input/output jacks/terminal:
For audio input
• 2 optical digital input jacks
• 2 coaxial digital input jacks
• 2 sets of analog input jacks
• 1 universal dock terminal
(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)
For audio/video input
• 2 HDMI input jacks
For audio output
• 1 subwoofer output jack
For audio/video output
• 1 HDMI output jack
For video output
• 1 analog output jack
Use these jacks/terminal to connect external components such as your TV, DVD player, VCR, digital satellite tuner, cable
TV tuner, digital air wave tuner, portable audio player, game console, and iPod. Further, by connecting a subwoofer to
this unit, you can enjoy reinforced low-bass sounds. For details on how to connect various types of external components
to this unit, see pages 21 to 28.
• Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are
complete.
• Unplug the AC power supply cable before changing connections, moving or cleaning this unit.
Connections
CAUTION
TV
This unit
Audio connection
Video connection
VCR or game consoleDVD player Subwoofer Digital satellite tuner
or cable TV tuner
portable audio
player
20 En
Connections
■ Cables used for connections
HDMI cable
Audio pin cable (supplied)
Optical cable (supplied)
Digital audio pin cable (supplied)
3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable
Subwoofer pin cable
OSD video pin cable (supplied)
■ Notes on connecting the optical cable
• Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable.
When you are not using the optical cable, be sure to put
the cap back in place.
• When inserting the cable into the optical digital jack,
make sure the direction is correct.
■ Affixing cables
To prevent cables from becoming unplugged, place the
supplied cable clamp with the open side facing upward,
attach it to the rear panel of this unit in a suitable position,
and then affix cables in the cable clamp.
■ Information on HDMI™
Audio Signals
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video
and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of
DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
y
• We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5 m
(16 ft) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack
↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
■ Priority order for audio input signals
When multiple types of audio signals are simultaneously
being input from a single source component, this unit
plays back the audio signals in the following priority
order: HDMI → Digital → Analog
As default settings, the following input jacks are assigned
to the corresponding input sources:
Before connecting components
Audio/Video
Audio
Video
A
(White)
(Red)
(White)
(Red)
(Orange)(Orange)
5
(Yellow)(Yellow)
Cap
Input source Audio signal type
DVD video Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM
DVD audio
2-channel stereo
(up to 96 kHz/24 bit)
Blu-ray Disc
HD DVD
Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM
Notes
Input
jack
Input
source
HDMI Digital Analog
TV/STB
DVD
AUX 1
AUX 2
AUX 3
Optical cable
Attach to this unit
21 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
This unit is equipped with 2 HDMI input jacks and 1 HDMI output jack. If your TV and other components have HDMI
jacks, use HDMI cables for simpler and easier connections, and you can skip the connection procedures from page 22 to
25. If your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner and an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack
on your TV to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit.
• Even if you connect your TV and this unit via the HDMI jack, you need to connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO
OUT jack on this unit in order to display the OSD of this unit.
• When HDMI CONTROL is set to OFF (see page 82) and this unit is in the standby mode, the signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are
not output at the HDMI OUT jack.
y
We recommend that you secure the HDMI cable(s) with adhesive tape, etc. once you have connected the HDMI cable(s) to the HDMI
jack(s) of this unit.
HDMI cable OSD video pin cable
Optical cable
Connections using HDMI cables
Notes
AUX 1
DVD
IN
OUT
HDMI
A AA
DIGITAL INPUTOUT
TV/STB
DVD
SUBWOOFER
AUX 1
AUX 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
Rear panel of this unit
TV
Video
input
HDMI
output
HDMI
input
HDMI
output
DVD player/recorder
Digital satellite tuner,
cable TV tuner,
digital airwave tuner,
or game console
Optical
digital
output
*
This connection (except for a game
console) is not necessary if your
TV has a built-in digital satellite
tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital
airwave tuner.
Audio/Video
A
Video
Audio
22 En
Connections
For audio connection, connect the analog audio output jacks on your TV to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this
unit. If your TV has an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack on your TV to the TV/STB
OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit.
For video connection, connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD
for easy viewing when you adjust the system parameters in SET MENU.
y
To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20).
• If you make analog and optical digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals
input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO
INPUT jacks.
• Even if you connect your TV and this unit via the HDMI jack, you need to connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO
OUT jack on this unit in order to display the OSD of this unit.
OSD video pin cable Audio pin cable
Optical cable
Connecting a TV
Notes
DIGITAL INPUTOUT
TV/STB
DVD
SUBWOOFER
IR INXM
TV/STB
AUX 1 AUX 1
AUX 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
DOCK
AUDIO INPUTANTENNA
Rear panel of this unit
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
TV
Optical
digital
output
RL
Video
input
Analog
audio
output
Video Audio
23 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player/recorder to the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on
this unit. When you connect this unit to your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder, connect the analog audio output jacks on
your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder to the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit in addition to the coaxial digital
audio connection.
y
To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20).
• Check that your DVD player/recorder is properly set to output Dolby Digital and DTS digital audio signals. If not, adjust the system
settings of your DVD player/recorder. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your DVD player/recorder.
• If your DVD player/recorder does not have a coaxial digital output jack, make an optical digital audio connection instead (see
page 27).
Audio pin cable
Digital audio pin cable
Connecting a DVD player/recorder
Notes
DIGITAL INPUTOUT
TV/STB
DVD
SUBWOOFER
IR INXM
TV/STB
AUX 1 AUX 1
AUX 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
DOCK
AUDIO INPUTANTENNA
Coaxial
digital
output
Analog
audio
output
LR
DVD player/recorder
Video signal to the TV
Rear panel of this unit
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
*
For the DVD/VCR combo
player/recorder
connection
Audio
24 En
Connections
Connect the optical digital output jack on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL
DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. Connect the analog audio output jacks on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV
tuner to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit.
y
To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20).
Audio pin cable
Optical cable
Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner
DIGITAL INPUTOUT
TV/STB
DVD
SUBWOOFER
IR INXM
TV/STB
AUX 1 AUX 1
AUX 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
DOCK
AUDIO INPUTANTENNA
Rear panel of this unit
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Analog
audio
output
LR
Optical
digital
output
Digital satellite tuner
or cable TV tuner
Video signal to the TV
*
This connection (except for a game console) is not
necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite
tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner.
Audio
25 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
Connect the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit to the analog audio output jacks on your TV. Connect the optical
digital output jack on your digital airwave tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit in addition
to the analog audio connection. By doing so, you can enjoy both analog and digital broadcasts.
y
To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20).
Audio pin cable
Optical cable
Connecting a digital airwave tuner
DIGITAL INPUTOUT
TV/STB
DVD
SUBWOOFER
IR INXM
TV/STB
AUX 1 AUX 1
AUX 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
DOCK
AUDIO INPUTANTENNA
Digital airwave tuner
Connect to the analog
audio output jacks on
the TV.
Optical
digital
output
Rear panel of this unit
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Video signal to the TV
*
This connection (except for a game console) is not
necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite
tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner.
Audio
26 En
Connections
Connect the analog audio output jack on your portable audio player to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel of this
unit.
3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable
Connecting a portable audio player
AUX 3
Portable audio player
Front panel of this unit
Analog
audio
output
Audio
27 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
If your component supports optical digital connections, connect the optical digital output jack on your component
(e.g., DVD player/recorder) to the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. If your component does not
support optical digital connections, connect the coaxial digital output jack on your component to the AUX 2 COAXIAL
DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit.
If your component does not support any digital connections, connect the analog audio output jacks on your component
(e.g., VCR) to the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit.
y
To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20).
If you make analog and digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals input at
the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT or AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack take priority over the analog audio signals input
at the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks.
Audio pin cable
Optical cable
Digital audio pin cable
Connecting other external components
Note
DIGITAL INPUTOUT
TV/STB
DVD
SUBWOOFER
IR INXM
TV/STB
AUX 1 AUX 1
AUX 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
DOCK
AUDIO INPUTANTENNA
Optical
digital
output
Video signal to the TV
DVD player/recorder, VCR,
game console, CD player, etc.
Rear panel of this unit
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Analog
audio
output
LR
Coaxial
digital
output
Audio
28 En
Connections
Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER OUT jack on this unit.
This connection alone does not output sound from the connected subwoofer. To output sound from the connected
subwoofer, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then run AUTO SETUP (see page 35) or select SWFR for BASS
OUT in SUBWOOFER SET (see page 78).
Subwoofer pin cable
Connecting a subwoofer
DIGITAL INPUTOUT
TV/STB
DVD
SUBWOOFER
IR INXM
TV/STB
AUX 1 AUX 1
AUX 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
DOCK
AUDIO INPUTANTENNA
5
Monaural
input
Subwoofer
Rear panel of this unit
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Audio
5
29 En
Connections
PREPARATION
English
Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM ANTENNA jack on this unit.
The IR IN terminal does not support normal external component connection. This is a control expansion terminal for
commercial use only.
Once all other connections are complete, plug the AC power supply cable into the AC wall outlet.
Connecting the FM antenna
DIGITAL INPUTOUT
TV/STB
DVD
SUBWOOFER
IR INXM
TV/STB
AUX 1 AUX 1
AUX 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
VIDEO
DOCK
AUDIO INPUTANTENNA
Rear panel of this unit
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
FM indoor antenna (supplied)
About the IR IN terminal (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Connecting the AC power supply cable
DIGITAL INPUT
TV/STB
DVD
IR INXMAUX 1
AUX 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
IR IN terminal
Rear panel of this unit
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
To the AC wall outlet
GETTING STARTED
30 En
1 Press and hold the mark on the battery
cover and then open the cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6,
UM-3) into the battery compartment.
Make sure you insert the batteries according to the
polarity markings (+/–).
3 Close the battery cover.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions: the operation range of the remote control decreases
or the transmission indicator does not light up or becomes dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• Exhausted batteries may leak. If the batteries have leaked,
dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked
material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean
the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new
batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste. Dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• The memory stored in the remote control may be erased in the
following cases:
– The remote control is left without batteries for more than two
minutes.
– Exhausted batteries remain in the remote control.
– The buttons on the remote control are accidentally pressed
when you change batteries.
• If the memory stored in the remote control is unwantedly
erased, insert new batteries and set the remote control codes
again.
y
Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote control.
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and
point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit
during operation.
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following places:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or a stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
• Do not expose the remote control sensor of this unit to direct
sunlight or lighting such as inverted fluorescent lamps.
• If the batteries grow old, the effective operation range of the
remote control decreases considerably. If this happens, replace
the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible.
Getting started
Installing batteries in the remote
control
Notes
Press
Operation range of the remote
control
Notes
45 45
Approximately
6 m (20 ft)
Getting started
31 En
SETUP
English
1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of
this unit.
The volume level appears in the front panel display,
and the current input source and beam mode are
displayed.
2 Press STANDBY/ON again to set this unit to
the standby mode.
When this unit is in the standby mode, only STANDBY/ON on
the front panel or on the remote control is operational, and the
other control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control
are not operational until the power of this unit is turned on.
Turning on this unit or
setting it to the standby mode
STANDBY/ON
VOLUME
+
INPUT
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY/ON
or
Front panel
Remote control
VOLUME 30
Current volume level
DVD MY SUR
Current input
source
Current beam
mode
Note
USING SET MENU
32 En
This section describes how to display the OSD (on-screen display) of this unit on your TV screen and to set the
parameters for your listening room. Once this is complete, you can enjoy real surround sound while watching TV in the
comfort of your own home.
1 Check that the video input jack on your TV is
connected to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit
to display the OSD of this unit.
2 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of
this unit.
3 Turn on the power of your TV.
The following screen appears on your TV.
If the OSD does not appear, use the remote control
supplied with your TV to switch the video input until
the OSD appears.
Using SET MENU
Displaying the OSD (on-screen display)
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY/ON
or
Front panel
Remote control
OSD screen example
Push [MENU] to begin set-up
YSP-3000
Using SET MENU
33 En
SETUP
English
The following diagram illustrates the overall flow of the setup procedure.
The flow chart of SET MENU
Run AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).
See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 35.
Look for a remedy.
See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for a complete list of error
messages and possible remedies.
Play back audio signals or adjust the settings for the beam mode and the CINEMA DSP.
See “Playback” on page 45, “Enjoying surround sound” on page 54, and “Using sound field programs” on
page 63.
Run MANUAL SETUP.
See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72.
y
• If you cannot clearly hear a sound beam from a specific channel, adjust settings for
SETTING PARAMETERS (see page 74) or for BEAM ADJUSTMENT (see page 75) in
BEAM MENU.
• If there are acoustically absorbent objects such as curtains in the path of the sound beams,
adjust settings for TREBLE GAIN in BEAM MENU (see page 77).
If an error occurs
If you want to make additional settings
and adjustments
Run LANGUAGE SETUP.
See “Changing OSD language” on page 34.
CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE
34 En
This feature allows you to select the language of your choice that appears in SET MENU of this unit.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press MENU.
The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.
y
• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,
press RETURN.
• To exit from SET MENU, press MENU once more.
• You can also perform the following operations while
viewing information in the front panel display.
3 Press / to select LANGUAGE SETUP,
and press ENTER.
The following screen appears on your TV.
4 Press / to select the desired language,
and press ENTER.
Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German),
Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish),
ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch),
Русский (Russian)
Changing OSD language
YSP
TV/AV
MENU
;MEMORY
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;LANGUAGE SETUP
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SET MENU
.
p
p
ENTER
ENGLISH
DEUTSCH
Francais
ESPANOL
ITALIANO
NEDERLANDS
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
;LANGUAGE SETUP
p
p
.
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
AUTO SETUP (INTELLIBEAM)
35 En
SETUP
English
This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams on the walls of your listening room and by broadening the
cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the
beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit.
This unit employs the beam optimization and sound optimization features with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam
microphone, allowing you to avoid troublesome listening-based setup and achieving highly accurate sound adjustments
that best match your listening environment. We call these two features “IntelliBeam” generically.
Beam optimization:
This feature optimizes the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment.
Sound optimization:
This feature optimizes the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment.
This unit performs a series of checks to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality. You can choose to optimize
all or part of the parameters.
*
1
The beam angle checking procedure is skipped if SOUND
OPTIMZ only is selected.
*
2
The sound optimization procedure is skipped if BEAM
OPTIMZ only is selected.
*
3
The subwoofer checking procedure is skipped if BEAM
OPTIMZ only is selected.
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
The flow chart of AUTO SETUP
*1
*2 *3
Checking the environment of
your listening room
Optimizing the beam angle
Checking the subwoofer and
optimizing the beam delay,
frequency, and volume
Beam
optimization
Sound
optimization
Notes
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
36 En
The supplied IntelliBeam microphone collects and analyzes the sound that this unit produces in your actual listening
environment. Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit and make sure that the
IntelliBeam microphone is placed in a proper location and that there are no large obstacles between the IntelliBeam
microphone and the walls in your listening room.
• After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone.
• The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat.
– Keep it away from direct sunlight.
– Do not place it on top of this unit.
• Do not connect the IntelliBeam microphone to an extension cable as doing so may result in an inaccurate sound optimization.
• An error may occur during the AUTO SETUP procedure if the IntelliBeam microphone is not properly placed in your listening room.
To avoid the possibility of an error:
– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone to the extreme right or left from the center of this unit.
– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit.
– Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone more than 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit.
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room as these objects
obstruct the path of sound beams. However, any objects that are in contact with the walls will be regarded as a protruding part of the
walls.
• The best possible results are achieved if the IntelliBeam microphone is placed at the same height as your ears would be when you are
seated in your listening position. However, if this is not possible, you can manually fine-tune the sound beam angle and balance the
sound beam output levels using MANUAL SETUP (see page 72) once the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed.
• If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover/high-cut frequency controls is connected to
this unit, set the volume between 10 and 12 o’clock as viewed on a conventional clockface and set
the crossover/high-cut frequency to the maximum.
1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power of
this unit.
2 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam
microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on
the front panel.
3 Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat
level surface more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the
front of the unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper
or lower from the center height of the unit
with the IntelliBeam microphone facing
upward at your normal listening position.
Be sure to place the IntelliBeam microphone on an
imaginary center line drawn from this unit.
y
You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone
stand to affix the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height
as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening
position.
Installing the IntelliBeam microphone
Notes
VOLUME
MIN MAX MIN
MAX
CROSSOVER
HIGH CUT
Subwoofer
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY/ON
or
Front panel
Remote control
INTELLIBEAM MIC
Note
IntelliBeam
microphone
More than
1.8 m (6.0 ft)
Within 1 m (3.3 ft)
upper or lower
from the center
height
Cardboard
microphone stand
Sofa
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
37 En
SETUP
English
■ Assembling the supplied cardboard
microphone stand
You will find three separate parts (one circular part and
two longitudinal parts) of the cardboard microphone stand
originally put together.
1 Disassemble the three parts of the cardboard
microphone stand originally put together.
2 Insert one of the longitudinal part into the
crevice of the other longitudinal part.
3 Place the circular part on top of the two
combined longitudinal parts.
4 Place the supplied IntelliBeam microphone
on top of the circular part.
Once the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to
this unit and properly placed in your listening room,
follow the procedure below to start the AUTO SETUP
procedure.
You can also enter the AUTO SETUP procedure simply by
pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two
seconds. In this case, this unit performs both of the beam
optimization and sound optimization procedures.
IntelliBeam
microphone
Center line
12
34
Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
STEREO
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
ENTER
OFF
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
+10
0
789
5
AV
SUR. DECODE
MY SUR.
YSP
TV/AV
STANDBY/ON
VOLUME
+
INPUT
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
38 En
• Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible while
this unit is performing the AUTO SETUP procedure.
• To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself from
your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is
completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound
beams.
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the AUTO SETUP procedure.
• The AUTO SETUP procedure may not be run successfully if
this unit is installed in one of the rooms described in “Before
installing this unit” on page 16. In such cases, run MANUAL
SETUP (see page 72) to manually adjust the corresponding
parameters.
• If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played, the AUTO SETUP
procedure stops, and an error message appears on the screen.
See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for
appropriate remedies.
y
• The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about three minutes
maximum. A chime is played when the AUTO SETUP
procedure is run successfully.
• If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend
following the procedure below.
1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection.
2. Run BEAM OPTIMZ only.
3. Close the curtains.
4. Run SOUND OPTIMZ only.
• You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP
procedure (see page 42). A set of settings optimized according
to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be
recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your
listening environment (see page 43).
1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of
this unit.
If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the
power of the subwoofer.
2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
3 Press MENU.
The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.
y
• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,
press RETURN.
• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU again.
• You can start the BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ procedure
simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more
than two seconds. Steps 4 and 5 are skipped and then the
screen shown in step 5 is displayed on your TV. Start the
AUTO SETUP procedure from step 6.
• You can also perform the following operations in the front
panel display.
4 Press / to select AUTO SETUP and
press ENTER.
The following screen appears on your TV.
Notes
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY/ON
or
Front panel
Remote control
YSP
TV/AV
MENU
;MEMORY
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;LANGUAGE SETUP
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SET MENU
.
p
p
1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ
2)BEAM OPTIMZ only
3)SOUND OPTIMZ only
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
;AUTO SETUP
.
p
p
ENTER
ENTER
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
39 En
SETUP
English
5 Press / to select BEAM+SOUND
OPTIMZ, BEAM OPTIMZ only, or SOUND
OPTIMZ only and then press ENTER.
The following screen appears on your TV.
BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ
(Beam optimization and sound optimization)
Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and
quality so that the parameters best match your listening
environment.
It is recommended that you should select this optimization
feature in the following cases:
• If you make settings for the first time.
• If the unit has been relocated.
• If your listening room has been restructured.
• If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.)
have been rearranged.
This menu takes about three minutes.
BEAM OPTIMZ only
(Beam optimization only)
Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best
matches your listening environment.
This menu takes about one minute.
SOUND OPTIMZ only
(Sound optimization only)
Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so
that the parameters best match your listening environment.
It is recommended that you should select this optimization
feature in the following cases:
• If you have opened or closed the curtains in your
listening room before using this unit.
• If you have manually set the beam angle.
This menu takes about two minutes.
You must optimize the beam angle in the BEAM OPTIMZ only
procedure before starting the SOUND OPTIMZ only procedure.
6 Check the following points once again before
starting the AUTO SETUP procedure.
• Is the IntelliBeam microphone firmly connected to
this unit?
• Is the IntelliBeam microphone placed in a proper
location?
• Are there any large obstacles in between the
IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your
listening room?
7 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP
procedure.
The following screen appears on your TV and the
AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds.
Leave the room quietly before starting the AUTO
SETUP procedure.
If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and an
error message is displayed. See “Error messages for
AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for a complete list of
error messages and their proper remedies. Follow the
instructions and perform the AUTO SETUP
procedure again.
Note
ENTER
ENTER
PREPARATION & CHECK
Please connect the MIC.
Please place the MIC at least
1.8m/6ft away from the YSP
unit. The MIC should be set
at ear level when seated.
Measurement takes about 3min.
After [ENTER] is pressed,
please leave the room.
[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel
AUTO SETUP
Will begin in 10sec
Please leave the room
**--------
[RETURN]:Cancel
AUTO SETUP START
ENTER
← Flashes
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
40 En
8 Check that the following screen is displayed
on your TV.
The results of the AUTO SETUP procedure are
displayed on your TV.
y
• If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is
displayed, we recommend running the AUTO SETUP
procedure again. For details, see step 9.
• If “SUBWOOFER : NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed
even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit,
increase the volume level of the subwoofer and run the
AUTO SETUP procedure again.
• Depending on the environment of your listening room,
the beam angle of front left and right, and surround left
and right may be set to the same value even if
“5 BEAM” is displayed as a result.
9 Press ENTER to confirm the results or press
RETURN to cancel the results.
The following screen is displayed for two seconds
and then disappears from your TV.
If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed in
step 8, the following screen is displayed after pressing
ENTER. In this case, see ERROR E-1 in “Error messages
for AUTO SETUP” on page 41. Press ENTER to exit
AUTO SETUP and then run the procedure again from
step 3.
10 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone from
the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front
panel.
y
If you want to save and load settings, see “Using the system
memory” on page 42.
MEASUREMENT COMPLETE
BEAM MODE :5 BEAM
SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE
[ENTER]:Save set-up.
[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.
SHOW RESULT
Example 1
MEASUREMENT COMPLETE
ENVIRONMENT CHECK[FAILED]
BEAM MODE :5 BEAM
SUBWOOFER :YES
[ENTER]:Save set-up.
[RETURN]:Do not save set-up.
SHOW RESULT
Example 2
←
Flashes
ENTER
AUTO SETUP COMPLETE
Please remove the MIC from
the YSP and the listening
position.
AUTO SETUP COMPLETE
Your YSP unit may not be set
up correctly.
We recommend you try again.
Please press [ENTER] key to
exit.
←
Flashes
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
41 En
SETUP
English
■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP
Before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts
While the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress
If one of the errors listed below except E-1 is displayed, press RETURN. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP
procedure by pressing AUTO SETUP in step 3, run the procedure again from step 3 after the screen disappears. In case
you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing MENU in step 3, run the procedure again from step 4 after the
screen in step 3 is displayed. Run MANUAL SETUP if the problem is difficult to be saved.
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
ERROR E-2
No MIC detected. Please check
MIC connection and re-try.
The IntelliBeam microphone is not
connected to this unit.
Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to
this unit.
36
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
ERROR E-1
Please test in quieter environment.
There is too much unwanted noise in
your listening room.
Make sure that your listening room is as
quiet as possible. You may want to
choose certain hours during the day
when there is not much noise coming
from outside.
—
ERROR E-2
No MIC detected. Please check
MIC connection and re-try.
The IntelliBeam microphone was
disconnected while the AUTO SETUP
procedure was in progress.
Make sure that the IntelliBeam
microphone is firmly connected to this
unit.
36
ERROR E-3
Unexpected control is detected.
Please re-try.
Some other operations were performed
on this unit while the AUTO SETUP
procedure was in progress.
Do not perform any other operations
while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in
progress.
—
ERROR E-4
Please check MIC position. MIC
should be set in front of YSP.
The IntelliBeam microphone is not
placed in front of this unit.
Make sure that the IntelliBeam
microphone is installed in front of this
unit.
36
ERROR E-5
Please check MIC position. MIC
should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft.
The IntelliBeam microphone is not
placed in the right distance from this
unit.
Make sure that the IntelliBeam
microphone is installed more than 1.8 m
(6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and
within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height
of this unit.
36
ERROR E-6
Volume level is lower than
expected. Please check MIC
position/connection and re-try.
The IntelliBeam microphone cannot
collect the sound produced by this unit
because the sound output level is too low.
Make sure that the IntelliBeam
microphone is firmly connected to this
unit and placed in a proper location. If
the problem persists, contact the nearest
authorized Yamaha service center for
assistance.
36
ERROR E-7
Unexpected error happened.
Please re-try.
An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure.
—
USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY
42 En
You can save the current settings adjusted in SET MENU
in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save
certain settings according to the varying conditions of
your listening environment. For example, if there are
curtains in the path of sound beams, the effectiveness of
the sound beams will vary depending on whether the
curtains are open or closed.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press MENU.
The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.
y
• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,
press RETURN.
• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once
more.
• You can also perform the following operations in the front
panel display.
3 Press / to select MEMORY and press
ENTER.
The following screen appears on your TV.
4 Press / to select SAVE and press
ENTER.
The following screen appears on your TV.
Using the system memory
Convenient usage of the system
memory
Saving settings
When the curtains are
open
When the curtains are
closed
YSP
TV/AV
MENU
;MEMORY
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;LANGUAGE SETUP
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SET MENU
.
p
p
ENTER
1)LOAD
2)SAVE
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
;MEMORY
.
p
p
ENTER
ENTER
MEMORY1
MEMORY2
MEMORY3
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Enter
2)MEMORY SAVE
p
p
.
ENTER
Using the system memory
43 En
SETUP
English
5 Press / to select MEMORY1,
MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER.
The following screen appears on your TV.
6 Press ENTER again.
The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1,
MEMORY2, or MEMORY3. Once the parameters
are saved, the display returns to the SET MENU
screen.
7 Press MENU to exit.
The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV.
You can recall the settings saved in “Saving settings” on
page 42 according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press MENU.
The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.
y
• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,
press RETURN.
• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once
more.
• You can also perform the following operations in the front
panel display.
3 Press / to select MEMORY and press
ENTER.
The following screen appears on your TV.
MEMORY1 Save Now ?
Push [ENTER] to Save
2)MEMORY SAVE
ENTER
ENTER
MEMORY1 Saving
2)MEMORY SAVE
ENTER
;MEMORY
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;LANGUAGE SETUP
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SET MENU
.
p
p
MENU
Loading settings
YSP
TV/AV
MENU
;MEMORY
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;LANGUAGE SETUP
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SET MENU
.
p
p
ENTER
1)LOAD
2)SAVE
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
;MEMORY
.
p
p
ENTER
Using the system memory
44 En
4 Press / to select LOAD and press
ENTER.
The following screen appears on your TV.
5 Press / to select MEMORY1,
MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER.
The following screen appears on your TV.
6 Press ENTER again.
The new parameters saved as MEMORY1,
MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 are loaded. Once the
parameters are loaded, the display returns to the SET
MENU screen.
7 Press MENU to exit.
The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV.
ENTER
MEMORY1
MEMORY2
MEMORY3
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Enter
1)MEMORY LOAD
p
p
.
ENTER
MEMORY1 Load Now ?
Push [ENTER] to Load
1)MEMORY LOAD
ENTER
ENTER
MEMORY1 Loading
1)MEMORY LOAD
ENTER
;MEMORY
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;LANGUAGE SETUP
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SET MENU
.
p
p
MENU
PLAYBACK
45 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can play back sound from the components connected
to this unit simply by pressing INPUT on the front panel
repeatedly or pressing one of the input selector buttons
(TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, or AUX3) on the remote
control. The name of the selected input source and the
type of corresponding input mode appear in the front
panel display.
■ Front panel operations
Press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to
toggle between TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, and
AUX3.
The name of the corresponding input source and the type
of current input mode are displayed in the front panel
display.
■ Remote control operations
y
In addition to controlling this unit, you can also operate other AV
components if you set up the remote control with the appropriate
remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/
AV to change the control area (see page 96).
Press TV to play back a TV program.
Press STB to play back a satellite broadcast.
Press DVD to play back a DVD.
Playback
Selecting the input source
STEREO
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
ENTER
OFF
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
DOCK
+10
0
789
5
YSP
TV/AV
SUR. DECODE
MY SUR.
STANDBY/ON
VOLUME
+
INPUT
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
TV
TV/STB AUTO
Name of the selected
input source
Type of the selected
input mode
STB
TV/STB AUTO
DVD
DVD AUTO
46 En
Playback
Press AUX1 (or AUX2) to play back a component
connected to the AUX 1 (or AUX 2) jack on the
rear panel of this unit.
Press AUX3 to play back a component connected
to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel.
Once an input source is selected (see page 45), you can
play back the selected input source.
This section uses a DVD player as an example of the playback
source.
y
For details on your TV and DVD player, refer to the respective
owner’s manual.
1 Turn on the power of your DVD player.
2 Switch to the video input on your TV using
the remote control supplied with the TV and
display the DVD menu screen.
If necessary, turn down the volume of your TV until no
sound is heard.
3 Press DVD to select DVD as the input source.
4 Play back DVD on your DVD player using the
supplied remote control.
Audio signals from your DVD player are output from
this unit.
y
• You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the
digital signals being input at the DVD player with the digital
connection (optical/coaxial/HDMI). The input channel and LFE
indicators light up when this unit detects the 5.1-channel signal
input at the optical/coaxial/HDMI jack. If the indicator
lights up, confirm the settings of the digital output, bitstream
output, DTS output, and/or HDMI output of the DVD player.
• If the output volume is too low, increase the volume of this unit
to around 45.
• If you have set the appropriate remote control codes for your
TV and DVD player, you can use the remote control supplied
with this unit to operate these components. For details on how
to set remote control codes, see page 96.
Playing back sources
Note
AUX1
AUX1 AUTO
AUX3
AUX3
Note
DVD
PCM
47 En
Playback
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Press VOLUME +/– to increase or decrease the
volume level.
The numeric value of the volume level appears in the front
panel display.
Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99,
MAX (maximum)
• The volume level of all input sources (including multi-channel
as well as stereo sources) changes at the same time.
• One volume level increases or decreases each time you press
VOLUME +/–.
• You can continuously increase or decrease the volume level if
you press and hold VOLUME +/–.
■ Muting the sound
1 Press MUTE to mute the sound.
“AUDIO MUTE ON” appears in the front panel
display, and the volume level indicator flashes.
2 Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to
resume the sound output.
“AUDIO MUTE OFF” appears temporarily in the
front panel display (or the numeric value of the
current volume level appears if you press VOLUME
+/–), and the volume level indicator lights up.
The sound output of all input sources (including multi-channel as
well as stereo sources) is muted at the same time.
y
You can select whether the sound output is to be muted
completely or by 20 dB when you press MUTE (see page 78).
Adjusting the volume
Notes
STANDBY/ON
VOLUME
+
INPUT
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
TV INPUT TV MUTE
CH
VOLUME
+
VOLUME
VOLUME 30
or
Front panel
Remote control
Note
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
TV INPUT TV MUTE
CODE SET
CH
DVD 5BEAM
MUTE
AUDIO MUTE ON
Flashes
AUDIO MUTE OFF
VOLUME
Lights up
MUTE
or
FM TUNING
48 En
There are two tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when the radio signal is strong and
there is no interference. If the radio signal is weak, tune into the FM station manually. You can also use the automatic and
manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations in total (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station
numbers each).
y
• This section exceptionally uses the remote control for Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models.
• When the operation mode selector is set to TV/AV, you can operate all FM functions. When the operation mode selector is set to YSP,
you can only operate the functions described in “Selecting a preset station” (see page 52).
Orient the connected FM antenna for the best reception.
■ Remote control functions
Set the operation mode selector (8) to TV/AV before
tuning or preset tuning.
1 FM
Selects FM as the input source. This unit is tuned into the
last selected FM station.
y
U.S.A. and Canada models use FM/XM.
2 PRESET/TUNE
Switches between the preset search mode and the
frequency search mode (see page 51).
3 Numeric buttons
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select the preset station
numbers (see page 52).
4 ENTRY ( / )
• Selects the preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the
colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display
(see page 52).
• Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not
displayed in the front panel display (see page 49).
5 A-E ( / )
Selects the preset station groups (A to E) (see page 51).
y
U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E .
6 MEMORY
• Stores a preset station in the memory (see page 51).
• Hold down this button for more than three seconds to
start automatic preset tuning (see page 50).
7 SEARCH
Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator
is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is
turned off) (see page 49).
8 Operation mode selector
Selects the operation mode of this unit.
FM tuning
Note
FM controls and functions
STEREO MY SUR.
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER
MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
SUR. DECODE
OFF
CODE SET
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
CH
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
+10
0
789
5
AV
YSP
TV/AV
ENTRY
A-E
FM
A-E
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(Europe, Australia, Asia, and
Korea models)
49 En
FM tuning
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Automatic tuning is effective when the radio station
signals are strong and there is no interference.
1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.
2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
y
• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to
select FM as the input source.
• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM
again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).
3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the
colon (:) off.
4 Press ENTRY ( / ) once to begin
automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into an FM station, the
TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the
station appears in the front panel display.
• Press to tune into a higher frequency.
• Press to tune into a lower frequency.
If the desired FM station signal is weak, tune into it
manually.
Manual tuning automatically switches the tuner to the monaural
reception mode to increase the signal quality.
1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.
2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
y
• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to
select FM as the input source.
• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM
again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).
Automatic tuning
YSP
TV/AV
FM
A FM 88.9 MHz
Lights up
No colon (:)
SEARCH
Manual tuning
Note
ENTER
ENTRY
YSP
TV/AV
FM
50 En
FM tuning
3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO
indicator disappears from the front panel
display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the
colon (:) off.
4 Press ENTRY ( / ) to tune into the
desired station manually.
y
Hold down the button for quick search.
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 5 preset
station groups with 8 preset station numbers each). You
can recall the preset stations easily by selecting the preset
station groups and numbers.
1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.
2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
y
• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to
select FM as the input source.
• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM
again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).
3 Press and hold MEMORY for more than three
seconds.
The preset station group and number, the MEMORY
indicator, and the AUTO indicator flash. Automatic
preset tuning starts from the current frequency and
proceeds toward higher frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
• When you overwrite an existing preset station, the
previously stored FM station is cleared.
• If the number of automatically preset stations does not
reach 40 (E8), this unit automatically stops searching.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are preset
automatically. If the desired station is weak in signal
strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in
“Manual preset tuning” on page 51.
Automatic preset tuning
SEARCH
A FM 88.9 MHz
No colon (:)
ENTER
ENTRY
YSP
TV/AV
Notes
FM
A1:FM 88.9 MHz
Flashes
Flashes
MEMORY
51 En
FM tuning
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 5 preset
station groups with 8 preset station numbers each)
manually.
1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.
2 Tune into the desired FM station.
See page 49 for tuning instructions.
3 Press MEMORY.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 10 seconds.
4 Press A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a
preset station group (A to E) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The selected preset station group letter appears.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
y
• If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to
display the colon.
• U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E .
• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you
can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT
for U.S.A. and Canada models).
5 Press ENTRY ( / ) to select a preset
station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
y
• You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired
preset station number.
• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you
can select the desired preset number by pressing / .
6 Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator
is flashing.
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display together with the station band and
frequency. The MEMORY indicator disappears from
the front panel display.
• When you overwrite an existing preset station, the
previously stored FM station is cleared.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along
with the station frequency.
Manual preset tuning
YSP
TV/AV
Flashes
MEMORY
A :FM 88.9 MHz
ENTER
A-E
Preset
station
group
Colon (:)
Flashes
Notes
A1:FM 88.9 MHz
Preset station number
ENTER
ENTRY
Flashes
A1:FM 88.9 MHz
The displayed station has been stored as A1.
MEMORY
52 En
FM tuning
You can tune into the preset stations simply by selecting
the preset station groups and numbers.
1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.
2 Press FM to select FM as the input source.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
y
• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to
select FM as the input source.
• If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM
again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only).
3 Press A-E ( / ) to select the desired
preset station group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
y
• If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to
display the colon.
• U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E .
• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you
can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT
for U.S.A. and Canada models).
4 Press ENTRY ( / ) to select the desired
preset station number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display together with the station band and
frequency.
y
• You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired
preset station number.
• Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you
can select the desired preset number by pressing / .
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by
FM stations. You can display the four types of the Radio
Data System information: PS (program service), PTY
(program type), RT (radio text), and CT (clock time). The
corresponding indicators light up in the front panel
display.
• You can select the Radio Data System display modes only when
the corresponding Radio Data System indicators are lit in the
front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive
all of the Radio Data System data from the station.
• If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit
may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In
particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and
may not be available even when the other Radio Data System
display modes are available.
• In case of poor reception conditions, tune into the desired
station manually (see page 49).
• In case the signal strength is weakened by external interference
while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the
reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in
the front panel display.
• If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT
WAIT” appears in the front panel display.
Selecting a preset station
YSP
TV/AV
FM
ENTER
A-E
Displaying the Radio Data System
information (Europe model only)
Notes
ENTER
ENTRY
A1:FM 88.9 MHz
53 En
FM tuning
BASIC
OPERATION
English
1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
We recommend automatic preset tuning to tune into
the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see
page 50).
The AUTO PS feature of this unit changes the frequency
display to the “PS” mode if the Radio Data System station
broadcasts the PS data.
2 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to select the
desired Radio Data System display mode.
• Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data
System program.
• Select “PTY” to display the type of Radio Data
System program.
• Select “RT” to display the information on the
Radio Data System program.
• Select “CT” to display the current time.
In the “RT” mode, this unit can scroll the display with a
maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the
umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with
the “_” (underscore).
Note
Note
CTRTPTYPS
Frequency display
DISPLAY
Program type Descriptions
NEWS
News
AFFAIRS
Current affairs
INFO
General information
SPORT
Sport
EDUCATE
Education
DRAMA
Drama
CULTURE
Culture
SCIENCE
Science
VARIED
Light entertainment
POP M
Pop music
ROCK M
Rock music
M.O.R.M
Middle-of-the-road music
LIGHT M
Light classical
CLASSICS
Serious classical
OTHER M
Other music
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
54 En
You can enjoy multi-channel surround sound by changing the beam mode using the beam mode buttons on the remote
control. Select 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, or My Surround for multi-channel playback.
• When ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER is set in MANUAL SETUP (see page 74), 5 Beam and 3 Beam cannot be selected.
• To enjoy 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam as the beam mode, you must perform AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP so that
the parameters best match your listening environment.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press one of the beam mode buttons
(5BEAM, ST+3BEAM, 3BEAM, or MY SUR.) to
select the desired beam mode for 5.1-
channel play back.
Outputs sound beams from the front left, front right,
center, surround left, and surround right channels. This
mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the
fullest when you watch DVDs recorded in a multi-channel
format or play back 2-channel sources in a multi-channel
format.
Press 5BEAM to select 5 Beam.
• To achieve the best surround sound effect, make sure that there
are no obstacles placed in the path of sound beams in that the
objects may prevent the sound beams from rebounding directly
off the walls in your listening room.
• The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls
in your listening room.
• “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if
INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR
CORNER (see page 74).
Enjoying surround sound
Notes
STEREO MY SUR.
MY BEAM
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
ENTER
SUR. DECODE
OFF
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
+10
0
789
5
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
2
1
3
5BEAM
ST+3BEAM
3BEAM
6
MY SUR.
5 Beam
Notes
1
5BEAM
55 En
Enjoying surround sound
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Outputs normal sound from the front left and right
channels and sound beams from the center and surround
left and right channels. This mode is ideal for watching
live recordings on a DVD. Vocals and instrumental sounds
can be heard close to the center of the listening position
while sound reflections from the venue itself can be heard
on your right and left, giving you the feeling that you are
sitting right in front of the stage.
Press ST+3BEAM to select Stereo plus 3 Beam.
The front left and right sound beams are output directly toward
the listening position.
Outputs sound beams from the front left and right and
center channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies
with the whole family. Because the listening position area
is widened, you can enjoy excellent quality surround
sound over a wider area. In addition, you can use this
mode when the listening position is close to the backside
of the wall, and the surround left and right sound beams
cannot be reflected off the wall.
Press 3BEAM to select 3 Beam.
y
You can achieve a more realistic surround effect if you adjust
settings for IMAGE LOCATION in BEAM MENU (see page 77).
• When you play back multi-channel sources, surround left and
right signals are mixed down and output from the front left and
right channels.
• The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls
in your listening room.
• “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if
INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR
CORNER (see page 74).
This mode enables surround system in a small listening
area which may not fulfill the listening room conditions
for other beam modes (see “Before installing this unit” on
page 16). Use this beam mode when you want to enjoy
surround sound near this unit, or when the other beam
modes are unavailable.
Press MY SUR. to select My Surround.
• Beam mode settings such as beam angles and distances are
ineffective in this mode.
• For the full effect of My Surround, your listening position must
face toward the front of this unit.
Stereo plus 3 Beam
Note
3 Beam
2
ST+3BEAM
3
3BEAM
Notes
My Surround
Notes
6
MY SUR.
56 En
Enjoying surround sound
■ Decoder indicators
Depending on the input source and the selected surround
mode, the decoder indicators in the front panel display
light up as follows:
y
• You can select an input mode (AUTO, DTS, or ANALOG) by
pressing INPUTMODE repeatedly (see page 87).
• Discs encoded in DTS-ES, Dolby Digital 5.1 EX, Dolby Digital
EX, or Dolby Digital Surround EX will be played back in DTS
or Dolby Digital.
■ Input channel indicators
Depending on the channel component of the current
digital input signal, the input channel indicators in the
front panel display light up as follows:
■ Surround modes and recommended
sources
• When you select an input source (see page 45), the surround
mode used for the previously selected input source is
automatically selected.
• If the power of this unit is turned off and on again, the surround
mode used for the previously selected input source before the
power was turned off is automatically selected.
• If the surround modes are not available, “Prohibit” appears in
the front panel display when you press SUR. DECODE.
• The surround modes are available:
– when the beam mode is set to a setting other than the 2-
channel or 5-channel stereo playback (see page 60) and My
Surround (see page 55).
– when the CINEMA DSP programs are turned off
(see page 65).
– when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP
program (see page 64). In this case, only Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, and DTS Neo:6 Cinema are
available.
– when 2-channel signals are being input.
– when the Music Enhancer is turned off (see page 66).
Status Indicator
When PCM signals are being input
When DTS digital signals are being
input
When DTS Neo:6 is selected as the
surround mode
When Dolby Digital signals are
being input
When Dolby Pro Logic is selected
as the surround mode
When Dolby Pro Logic II is selected
as the surround mode
Status Indicator
When 2-channel stereo signals are
being input
When 5.1-channel signals are being
input
PCM
+
DIGITAL
PL
PL
Surround mode
Recommended
source
Dolby Pro Logic – All sources
Dolby Pro Logic II
Movie
Music
Game
Movies
Music
Games
DTS Neo:6
Cinema
Music
Movies
Music
Neural Surround
(U.S.A. and
Canada models
only)
–
XM Satellite Radio
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
Notes
57 En
Enjoying surround sound
BASIC
OPERATION
English
This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 5.1-channel
playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound
effects by switching the surround mode.
y
The surround modes are available only when the CINEMA DSP
programs are turned off (see page 65) or when the movie program
is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 64). In
addition, the beam mode must be set to 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3
Beam, or 3 Beam (see page 54), while the Music Enhancer must
be also turned off (see page 66).
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press
SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to
switch between surround modes.
Choices: Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music, PRO LOGIC,
PLII Movie, PLII Music, PLII Game, neural surround
Default setting: Neo:6 Cinema
Enjoying 2-channel sources
in surround sound
STEREO MY SUR.
MY BEAM
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
ENTER
SUR. DECODE
OFF
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
+10
0
789
5
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
SUR. DECODE
SUR. DECODE
ENTER
or
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
PRO LOGIC
PLII Movie
PLII
Music
PLII
Game
neural surround
Example of the surround
mode display in the front
panel display when the
CINEMA DSP program
and the Music Enhancer
are turned off
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
58 En
Enjoying surround sound
You can enjoy analog audio signals output from your TV
in real surround sound.
y
Before performing the steps below, set the volume of this unit to
30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in step 4 below.
1 Select the TV channel you want to watch.
To select a TV channel, use the remote control
supplied with your TV.
2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
3 Press TV.
This unit outputs audio signals from your TV.
4 If you hear sound from your TV speakers,
reduce the volume level of your TV until you
can no longer hear any audio being output.
To reduce the TV volume level, use the remote
control supplied with your TV.
5 Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume
level.
6 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press
SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to
switch between surround modes.
Signals input from 2-channel sources are played back
in multi-channels.
For more information on surround modes, see
page 56.
Enjoying TV in surround sound
STEREO
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
ENTER
SUR. DECODE
OFF
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MY SUR.
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
STB
TV
+10
0
789
5
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
TV
VOLUME
SUR. DECODE
SUR. DECODE
ENTER
or
59 En
Enjoying surround sound
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can configure the parameters for Dolby Pro Logic II
Music and DTS Neo:6 Music to fine-tune the surround
sound effect.
1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Enjoying 2-channel
sources in surround sound” on page 57 and
select PL II Music or Neo:6 Music.
2 Press / to select the parameter.
3 Press / to configure the selected
parameter.
■ When Dolby Pro Logic II Music is
selected
PANORAMA
Gives the front left and right channel sound a
wraparound effect, distributed throughout the entire
surround sound field to give you an expansive feeling.
Choices: ON/OFF
Default setting: OFF
DIMENSION
Adjusts the difference in volume between the front
and surround channels to the desired volume balance.
Control range: –3 (toward the surround direction) to
+3 (toward the front direction)
Default setting: STD (standard)
C. WIDTH
Distributes the center channel sound to the left and
right. If 0 is selected, the center channel sound is
output only from the center channel.
Control range: 0 to 7
Default setting: 3
■ When DTS Neo:6 Music is selected
C. IMAGE
Adjusts the center image from three channels (front
left and right and center) to varying degrees.
Control range: 0.0 (wider) to 1.0 (toward the center)
Default setting: 0.3
Adjusting surround mode
parameters
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
ENTER
SUR. DECODE
OFF
SPORTSMUSIC MOVIE
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
+10
0
789
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
ENTER
ENTER
ENJOYING STEREO SOUND
60 En
You can enjoy 2-channel and 5-channel stereo playback as the beam modes by pressing STEREO on the remote control.
• When you play back Dolby Digital audio signals in the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback, the dynamic range becomes
compressed. If the volume level decreases to the extreme, use other beam modes except My Beam.
• When the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 56) and the CINEMA
DSP programs (see page 63) become ineffective.
Sounds are output from the front right and left channels.
This is ideal for playing back hi-fi sources, such as CDs,
and can be used to replace your TV speakers.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press STEREO to select the 2-channel stereo
playback as the beam mode.
“STEREO” appears in the front panel display.
When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except
those from the front left and right channels are mixed down and
output from the front left and right channels. No audio is output
from the center and surround channels.
Sounds are output from front left and right, center, and
surround left and right. This is ideal for playback in a large
listening area or at a party.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press STEREO twice to select the 5-channel
stereo playback as the beam mode.
“5CH STEREO” appears in the front panel display.
Enjoying stereo sound
Notes
2-channel stereo playback
STEREO
MY BEAM MY SUR.
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
SPORTS
MUSIC MOVIE
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
+10
0
789
5
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
4
STEREO
STEREO
Note
5-channel stereo playback
YSP
TV/AV
4
STEREO
5CH STEREO
PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (MY BEAM)
61 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can improve listenability in a noisy environment by changing the beam mode to My Beam, which outputs sound
beams directly toward the listening position in a single channel. In addition, My Beam is also ideal when you do not want
the sound beams to be reflected on the walls in your listening room or when you do not want to disturb other people
while enjoying music or movies at night.
If My Beam is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 56), the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 63), and TruBass
(see page 79) become ineffective. In addition, no audio is output from the subwoofer connected to this unit.
The My Beam microphone on the remote control collects
the test tones from this unit so that the beam angle can be
automatically adjusted.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press and hold MY BEAM for more than two
seconds.
A test tone is output twice from this unit. Keep
pointing the remote control toward this unit while the
test tones are being output so that the My Beam
microphone can collect the test tones.
Control range: L60° to R60°
Operation guarantee range: 6 m (20 ft), L45° to R45°
• If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and “MY BEAM
ERROR” is displayed in the front panel display.
• An error may occur if the listening room is noisy. Make sure
that the listening room is as quiet as possible while the test
tones are being output.
• Do not shake or move the remote control while the test tones are
being output.
• Do not cover the My Beam microphone on the remote control
while the test tones are being output.
• The batteries in the remote control may be weak if the remote
control does not function properly. In this case, replace all the
batteries and then try the procedure again.
• When the input signal with 64 kHz or 96 kHz of sampling
frequency is being played back, the beam angle cannot be
automatically adjusted.
Playing back sound clearly (My Beam)
Note
STEREO
MY BEAM MY SUR.
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
+10
0
789
5
YSP
TV/AV
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
AV
My Beam
microphone
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Using auto-adjust function
YSP
TV/AV
5
MY BEAM
Notes
62 En
Playing back sound clearly (My Beam)
You can adjust the beam angle manually while playing
back an input source. This function is also ideal if the
listening position is out of the operation guarantee range
of the auto-adjust function.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press MY BEAM.
“MY BEAM” is displayed in the front panel display.
3 Press / while “MY BEAM” is displayed to
adjust the beam angle.
Control range: L90° to R90°
• Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle
on the left side.
• Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle
on the right side.
Using manual-adjust function
YSP
TV/AV
5
MY BEAM
ENTER
ANGLE 0
USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
63 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
stereo or multi-channel sources. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha CINEMA DSP (digital sound field processing)
chip containing several sound field programs used to enhance your playback experience. Most of the CINEMA DSP
programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and
movie theaters.
y
The Yamaha CINEMA DSP programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources.
Choose a CINEMA DSP program based on your listening preference and do not purely rely on the name of the CINEMA DSP program
itself.
■ What is a sound field?
A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument is the multiple reflections from the walls of the
room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable the listener to tell where the player is situated as well
as the size and shape of the room in which the listener is sitting.
■ Elements of a sound field
In any environment, there are two distinct types of sound reflections combined with the direct sound coming straight to
our ears from the player’s instrument to make up the sound field.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 80 ms after the direct sound) after reflecting from one
surface only (from the ceiling or the wall, for example). Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, the back of the room, etc.) so numerous
that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct
sound.
Direct sound, early reflections, and subsequent reverberations all together help us determine the subjective size and shape
of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create the sound fields.
With the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you can create your own
listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a
listening room of virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with
the CINEMA DSP technology.
Using sound field programs
Note
64 En
Using sound field programs
You can select from three different CINEMA DSP
programs (MUSIC, MOVIE, and SPORTS) depending on
the type of source you want to enjoy. The CINEMA DSP
indicator lights up in the front panel display when one of
the CINEMA DSP programs is selected.
• The CINEMA DSP programs are ineffective when My
Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode.
• If the CINEMA DSP programs are not available, “Prohibit”
appears in the front panel display when you press one of the
CINEMA DSP program buttons on the remote control.
■ Music program
Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back
music sources. This program produces a vibrant
atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are seated in an
actual rock or jazz concert hall.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press MUSIC to select the music CINEMA
DSP program.
■ Movie program
Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back
movie sources, especially the ones encoded in Dolby
Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround. This program clearly
reproduces dialog and sound effects, thus creating a broad
and expansive cinematic space amid silence.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press MOVIE to select the movie CINEMA
DSP program.
■ Sports program
Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back
sports sources. This program densely concentrates the
vocal sound of the commentator in the center while
broadening the sound from the audience or the
environment all around your listening room.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press SPORTS to select the sports CINEMA
DSP program.
CINEMA DSP programs
Notes
STEREO
MY BEAM MY SUR.
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
+10
0
789
5
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
7
MUSIC
YSP
TV/AV
8
MOVIE
YSP
TV/AV
9
SPORTS
65 En
Using sound field programs
BASIC
OPERATION
English
■ Turning off CINEMA DSP programs
Turn off the CINEMA DSP programs if you want to enjoy
the original sound without the CINEMA DSP program
effect.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press OFF to turn off the CINEMA DSP
programs.
“CINEMA DSP OFF” is displayed in the front panel
display and the CINEMA DSP indicator disappears.
■ Adjusting CINEMA DSP effect levels
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. However, you can also adjust the effect level
of the CINEMA DSP programs relative to the level of the
direct sound so that each CINEMA DSP program can
reflect your listening environment and your preference
even more accurately.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press MUSIC, MOVIE, or SPORTS to select
the desired CINEMA DSP program.
3 Press / .
“DSP LEVEL” is displayed in the front panel display.
4 Press / to adjust the effect level of the
selected CINEMA DSP program.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
• A larger value increases the effect level.
• A smaller value decreases the effect level.
YSP
TV/AV
OFF
0
CINEMA DSP OFF
YSP
TV/AV
9
SPORTS
8
MOVIE
7
MUSIC
or or
DSP LEVEL 0dB
ENTER
ENTRY
ENTER
USING THE MUSIC ENHANCER
66 En
You can use the Music Enhancer of this unit to improve the sound nearest to the original depth and width of compression
artifacts such as the MP3 format.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press ENHANCER to select the Music
Enhancer.
The currently selected mode appears in the front
panel display.
3 Press ENHANCER repeatedly to switch
between the Music Enhancer levels (OFF,
MIN, and MAX).
The ENHANCER indicator lights up when
“ENHANCER:HIGH” or “ENHANCER:LOW” is
selected.
• The Music Enhancer is not compatible with the CINEMA DSP
programs. If a CINEMA DSP program is selected while the
Music Enhancer is on, the Music Enhancer is turned off
automatically. In this case, the Music Enhancer remains off
even after the CINEMA DSP program is canceled. Likewise, if
the Music Enhancer is turned on while a CINEMA DSP
program is selected, the CINEMA DSP program is canceled
automatically. In this case, the CINEMA DSP program remains
off even after the Music Enhancer is turned off.
• The Music Enhancer is available only when a setting other than
My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode.
Using the music enhancer
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
SPORTSMUSIC MOVIE
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
+10
0
789
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
ENHANCER
Notes
ENHANCER:HIGH
ENHANCER:LOW
ENHANCER OFF
ENHANCER
Lights up
USING THE VOLUME MODE (NIGHT LISTENING ENHANCER/TV VOLUME EQUAL MODE)
67 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
The night listening enhancers are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. In addition, you can limit
the volume level of the TV so that it will not vary suddenly to a great extent whenever the contents being broadcast
change (i.e. due to commercials, etc.).
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press VOL MODE repeatedly to select
NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, TV EQUAL
VOLUME, or OFF.
The NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel
display when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected.
The EQUAL indicator lights up in the front panel
display when “TV EQUAL VOLUME” is selected.
• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
to make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select TV EQUAL VOLUME when watching TV
programs.
• Select OFF to turn off the volume mode.
3 Press / to adjust the effect level of
compression while NIGHT:CINEMA,
NIGHT:MUSIC, or TV EQUAL VOLUME is
displayed.
• Select Effect.Lvl:MIN for minimum compression.
• Select Effect.Lvl:MID for standard compression.
• Select Effect.Lvl:MAX for maximum
compression.
• The volume mode settings are canceled if you press
STANDBY/ON or disconnect the AC power supply cable from
the AC wall outlet.
• The volume mode settings become ineffective when My
Surround is selected as the beam mode (see page 55).
Using the volume mode
(Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode)
STEREO
MY BEAM MY SUR.
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
+10
0
789
5
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
NIGHT:CINEMA
NIGHT:MUSIC
TV EQUAL VOLUME
OFF
VOL MODE
Lights up
Notes
Lights up
Effect.Lvl:MIN
Effect.Lvl:MID
Effect.Lvl:MAX
ENTER
USING THE SLEEP TIMER
68 En
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified period of time. The sleep timer is
useful if you are going to sleep after a certain amount of time while this unit is still playing back a source.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the interval
for the sleep timer.
Choices: 120min, 90min, 60min, 30min, OFF
The SLEEP indicator flashes in the front panel
display while switching the interval for the sleep
timer.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
3 Wait for a few seconds without operating this
unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer.
The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated.
Using the sleep timer
STEREO
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
SPORTS
MY SUR.
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
+10
0
789
5
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
SLEEP
Flashes
SLEEP
SLEEP 120min
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60min
SLEEP 30min
SLEEP OFF
Lights up
69 En
Using the sleep timer
BASIC
OPERATION
English
■ Canceling the sleep timer
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF”
appears in the front panel display.
3 Wait for a few seconds without operating this
unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer.
The SLEEP indicator disappears from the front panel
display, indicating that the sleep timer is deactivated.
The previous setting for the sleep timer before you deactivate it is
stored in the system memory.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be deactivated if you press
STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the standby mode or unplug the
AC power supply cable from the AC outlet.
Note
YSP
TV/AV
SLEEP
SLEEP OFF
Disappears
DISPLAYING THE INPUT SOURCE INFORMATION
70 En
You can display the format and sampling frequency of the current input signal in the front panel display.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press DISPLAY.
The information on the current input signal is
displayed as follows:
y
When the input signal is unclear, “___” is displayed for the
sampling frequency.
Displaying the input source information
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
+10
0
78
9
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
Input signal Indicator
Sampling
frequency
Dolby digital DOLBY DGTL
32/44.1/48/64/
88.2/96 kHz
DTS DTS
PCM PCM
Analog ANALOG –
DISPLAY
D.DGTL:48kHz
INPUT SIGNAL
DOLBY DGTL:48kHz
or
USING THE HDMI CONTROL FEATURE
71 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can operate the following functions using the remote control supplied with your TV if this unit and an HDMI
control-compatible TV (except some models) are connected via HDMI.
• Turning on or off the power (synchronized operation with the TV)
• Selecting the audio output component (TV or this unit)
• Adjusting the volume level (up/down and mute)
An example of the HDMI control-compatible component is a Panasonic EZ Sync (for U.S.A. and Canada) or Viera Link
(for other countries)-compatible component (TV, DVD recorder, Blu-ray recorder, etc.).
y
If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player via HDMI, you can also control the
connected component in synchronization with this unit (except some models).
1 Connect this unit to your HDMI control-compatible TV via HDMI.
For details about HDMI and HDMI components, see “Information on HDMI™” on page 20 and “Connections using
HDMI cables” on page 21. Also in the owner’s manual supplied with your TV, refer to the information on
connecting an AV amplifier.
2 Turn on the power of all components connected via HDMI.
For details about controlling external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components.
3 Check the system settings for all components connected via HDMI and activate the HDMI control
feature.
For details about setting external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components. Once you
have followed steps 1 to 3, you do not need to carry out the same procedure again next time.
4 Turn off the power of your TV and then turn on the power again.
5 Set the input source selector of your TV to this unit (HDMI, etc.).
6 Select the connected component as the input source by pressing INPUT on the front panel of this
unit (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). Confirm that the video
image played back on the DVD recorder (etc.) appears in your TV correctly.
7 Use the remote control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output
component, and adjust the volume level of this unit.
• Check the following if you cannot operate this unit in synchronization with your TV.
– Whether HDMI CONTROL is set to ON (see page 82).
– Whether the HDMI control feature is activated for your TV (see the owner’s manual supplied with your TV).
• While you are playing back audio from a non-HDMI component, turning off the power of your TV with the remote control
supplied with your TV does not turn off the power of this unit. Playback continues without being affected.
Using the HDMI control feature
Notes
MANUAL SETUP
72 En
To achieve the best quality surround sound, you can use MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune the listening environment
parameters, as well as to make advanced settings for sound signals, sound beams, digital input, and the OSD. Change the
initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your own listening environment.
y
• You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 42). A set of settings optimized according to the
specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening
environment (see page 43).
• Most of the parameters in SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU are automatically set when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 35). Use
SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU to make additional adjustments.
• BEAM MENU allows you to make settings for the surround sound effects normally available in the speaker settings menu.
• Make settings for the parameters in BEAM MENU first before making settings for the parameters in SOUND MENU, INPUT MENU,
and DISPLAY MENU.
SOUND MENU
Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output.
BEAM MENU
Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output.
INPUT MENU
Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input.
DISPLAY MENU
Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display.
MANUAL SETUP
Item Features Page
TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or low-frequency sound.
78
SUBWOOFER SET Adjusts the various subwoofer settings.
78
MUTE LEVEL Adjusts the muting level.
78
AUDIO DELAY Adjusts the audio delay.
79
ROOM EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the listening room.
79
DD/DTS Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
79
TruBass Selects the bass sound enhancer.
79
Item Features Page
SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts the listening room and listening position settings.
74
BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the various sound beam settings.
75
IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front left and right channels.
77
Item Features Page
INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
80
INPUT MODE Selects the initial input of the source.
80
INPUT TRIM Adjusts the input level of the source.
80
INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source.
81
HDMI SET Adjusts the various HDMI settings.
81
XM ANTENNA LEVEL
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signal.
82
Item Features Page
F.DISPLAY SET Adjusts the front panel display settings.
83
OSD SET Adjusts the OSD settings.
83
UNIT SET Changes the display unit of measurement.
83
73 En
MANUAL SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
You can adjust the SET MENU parameters while the unit is
reproducing sound.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press MENU.
The SET MENU screen appears on your TV.
y
• The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
• To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU,
press RETURN.
• To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once
more.
• You can also perform the following operations in the front
panel display.
3 Press / to select MANUAL SETUP and
press ENTER.
The following screen appears on your TV.
4 Press / to select a sub menu and press
ENTER.
5 Press / / / and ENTER to configure
each parameter.
6 Press MENU to exit.
The OSD disappears from your TV screen.
Using MANUAL SETUP
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
SPORTSMUSIC MOVIE
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
+10
0
789
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
MENU
;MEMORY
;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
;LANGUAGE SETUP
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
SET MENU
.
p
p
ENTER
ENTER
1)SOUND MENU
2)BEAM MENU
3)INPUT MENU
4)DISPLAY MENU
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
;MANUAL SETUP
.
p
p
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
MENU
74 En
MANUAL SETUP
Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to
the sound beam output.
SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM MENU
y
You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel in
“Adjusting the audio balance” (see page 84).
■ SETTING PARAMETERS
(Setting parameters)
Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room
and the distance of this unit from the listening position.
When you make settings for each parameter, other related
parameters are automatically adjusted to best match your
listening environment.
If you make adjustments in SETTING PARAMETERS, the beam
optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will
be lost. If you want to keep the beam optimization settings made
in the AUTO SETUP and make further adjustments, adjust
settings in BEAM ADJUSTMENT first (see page 75).
INSTALLED POSITION
(Installed position of this unit)
Use to adjust the installed position of this unit.
Choices: FLAT TO WALL (Parallel to wall installation),
ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER
(Corner installation)
• Select FLAT TO WALL if this unit is installed in
parallel with the wall in your listening room. Adjust the
width and length of your listening room as well as the
distance of the listening position from this unit and the
distance of the center of this unit from the left wall.
Choices for the room width and length:
2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft)
Choices for the listening position from this unit:
1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft)
Choices for the listening position from the left wall:
0.6 m to 11.4 m (2.0 ft to 38.0 ft)
BEAM MENU
Note
A)SETTING PARAMETERS
B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT
C)IMAGE LOCATION
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
2)BEAM MENU
.
p
p
INSTALLED POSITION
;;;;;;;FLAT TO WALL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
A)SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3
p
p
.
p
p
FLAT TO WALL
ANGLE TO WALL
OR CORNER
Listening position
from the left wall
Listening position
from the unit
Room width
Room length
A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3
|
-------[ 5.4m ]-
|
4.9m
|
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
p
p
p
p
--------|
2.7m [ 2.5m ]
|
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3
p
p
p
p
Room width and
length
Listening position
from the unit and
the left wall
75 En
MANUAL SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
• Select ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER if this unit is
installed in the corner of your listening room. Adjust
the width and length of your listening room as well as
the distance of the listening position from this unit.
Choices for the room width and length:
2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft)
Choices for the listening position from this unit:
1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft)
When you set the INSTALLED POSITION parameter in
MANUAL SETUP (see page 74), the parameters newly set for
the width and length of your listening room are automatically set
as the factory default value.
■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment)
Use to manually adjust the various sound beam settings.
We recommend that you select 5 Beam as the beam mode
before adjusting these parameters (see page 54).
• When INSTALLED POSITION is adjusted in MANUAL
SETUP (see page 74), the factory default value is automatically
set for this parameter except Center in FOCAL LENGTH (see
page 76).
• Depending on the beam mode settings (see pages 54 and 60),
some channel positions may not be available for selection. In
this case, “– –” is displayed. When using Stereo plus 3 Beam as
the beam mode, set the surround left and right signals to be
output from the front left and right channels.
HORIZONTAL ANGLE (Horizontal angle)
Use to adjust the horizontal angle of sound beams for each
channel. By adjusting the horizontal angle of the sound
beams, you can optimize the sound beam paths. A test
tone is automatically output.
Choices: L90° to R90°
Adjust toward L (left) to move the direction of the output
to the left and adjust toward R (right) to move it to the
right.
Note
Listening position
from the unit
Room length
Room width
----- 5.4m ---
|
[ 5.4m ]
|
|
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3
p
p
p
p
\
[ 2.5m ]
\
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3
p
p
p
p
Room width and
length
Listening
position from the
unit
Notes
a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE
b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH
c)FOCAL LENGTH
d)TREBLE GAIN
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT
.
p
p
( )
(+)
(+)
( )
5 beam
Front L L90 R90
L65deg
0(deg)
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
*
a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE 1/5
p
p
p
p
76 En
MANUAL SETUP
BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH (Beam travel length)
A certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound
from each channel so that all sounds can arrive at the
listening position at the same time. This menu sets the
distance that sound beams travel after being output and
reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening
position and adjusts the delay applied to the respective
channel.
The lines in the illustration below indicate the distance.
Choices: 0.3 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft)
• Front L adjusts the distance the front left channel
sound beams travel.
• Front R adjusts the distance the front right channel
sound beams travel.
• Center adjusts the distance the center channel sound
beams travel.
• Surround L adjusts the distance the surround left
channel sound beams travel.
• Surround R adjusts the distance the surround right
channel sound beams travel.
y
We recommend that you use the setting optimized by AUTO
SETUP (see page 35). Adjust this parameter only when you
changed HORIZONTAL ANGLE (see page 75).
FOCAL LENGTH (Focal length)
Use to set the distance from the front of this unit to the
focal point of output for each channel to achieve an
expansive feeling for each channel.
The focal points except for the center channel should be
set near the reflection points on the walls. The shorter the
distance, the larger the expansion.
Choices: –1.0 m to +13.0 m (–3.5 ft to +43.5 ft)
Adjust toward – (minus) to move the focus outward and
adjust toward + (plus) to move the focus toward the
normal position.
• Front L adjusts the focal length for the front left sound
beams.
• Front R adjusts the focal length for the front right
sound beams.
• Center adjusts the focal length for the center sound
beams. Initial setting: –0.5 m (–1.5 ft)
• Surround L adjusts the focal length for the surround
left sound beams.
• Surround R adjusts the focal length for the surround
right sound beams.
y
We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.5 m (or 1.5 ft))
for the center channel.
5 beam
Front L;;;;;;;6.0m
Front R;;;;;;;6.0m
Center;;;;;;;;2.5m
Surround L;;;;9.1m
Surround R;;;;9.1m
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH
p
p
.
p
p
focal length
focal point
sweet spot
Front left channel Center channel
5 beam
Front L;;;;;;+1.5m
Front R;;;;;;+1.5m
Center;;;;;;;-0.5m
Surround L;;;+2.3m
Surround R;;;+2.3m
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
c)FOCAL LENGTH
p
p
.
p
p
77 En
MANUAL SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
TREBLE GAIN (Treble gain)
Use to adjust the high-frequency output level of each
channel.
y
If the reflection points of the front left and right or surround left
and right sound beams are on curtain or other acoustically
absorbent surfaces, you can achieve more effective surround
sound by increasing the treble level for those sound beams.
Choices: –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
• Front L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the
front left channel.
• Front R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the
front right channel.
• Center adjusts the high-frequency output level of the
center channel.
• Surround L adjusts the high-frequency output level
of the surround left channel.
• Surround R adjusts the high-frequency output level
of the surround right channel.
■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location)
Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and
right channel sound is heard so that each sound can be
heard closer to the center channel.
Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound
coming from the front left and right channels seems
unnatural, such as when your listening position is not the
center of your listening room.
You can only adjust this parameter when 3 Beam or 5
Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 54).
Choices: ON, OFF
Setting range: 0% to 95%
Initial setting: 0%
LEFT (Left)
Adjusts audio signals toward the left.
The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the
center.
RIGHT (Right)
Adjusts audio signals toward the right.
The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the
center.
- +
Front L;;;;;;;;0dB
Front R;;;;;;;;0dB
Center;;;;;;;;;0dB
Surround L;;;;;0dB
Surround R;;;;;0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
d)TREBLE GAIN
p
p
.
p
p
------
------
------
------
------
p
OFF )ON
LCR
LEFT;;;;;;;;;;;0%
RIGHT;;;;;;;;;;0%
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
C)IMAGE LOCATION
p
p
.
p
p
Without adjustment
With the front left
channel adjusted
Without adjustment
With the front right
channel adjusted
78 En
MANUAL SETUP
Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to
the sound output.
SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SOUND MENU
■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control)
You can adjust the tonal quality of sound beams.
TREBLE (Treble)
Use to adjust the high-frequency response.
Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
BASS (Bass)
Use to adjust the low-frequency response.
Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer settings)
Use to manually adjust the various subwoofer
settings.
BASS OUT (Bass out)
Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the
subwoofer or the front left and right channels. This setting
also determines the routing of LFE (low-frequency effect)
signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
Choices: SWFR (Subwoofer), FRONT
• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and
low-frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the subwoofer.
• Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and
low-frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the front left and right channels.
CROSS OVER (Crossover)
When BASS OUT is set to SWFR, you can use this
feature to select a crossover (cutoff) frequency for all low-
frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected
frequency will be sent to the subwoofer position.
Choices: 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz
LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel according to the capacity of your
subwoofer. The LFE channel carries low-frequency
special effects which are only added to certain scenes.
This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby
Digital or DTS signals.
Choices: –20 to 0 dB
DISTANCE (Distance)
Select to adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the
listening position.
Choices: 0.3 to 15.0 m (1.0 ft to 50.0 ft)
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
■ MUTE LEVEL (Muting level)
Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
volume level.
Choices: MUTE, –20 dB
• Select MUTE to completely halt all sound output.
• Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume level by
20 dB.
SOUND MENU
A)TONE CONTROL
B)SUBWOOFER SET
C)MUTE LEVEL
D)AUDIO DELAY
E)ROOM EQ
F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range
G)TruBass
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1)SOUND MENU
.
p
p
-+
TREBLE;;;;;0dB
-+
BASS;;;;;;;0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
A)TONE CONTROL
p
p
.
p
p
------
------
BASS OUT;;;;;FRONT
CROSS OVER;;;100Hz
LFE LEVEL;;;;;;0dB
DISTANCE;;;;;;3.0m
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
B)SUBWOOFER SET
p
p
p
p
.
MUTE -20dB
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p
p
C)MUTE LEVEL
p
01EN_YSP-3000_UA.book Page 78 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:36 AM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
79 En
MANUAL SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay)
Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the
video image. This may be necessary when using certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Choices: 0 to 160 msec
■ ROOM EQ (Room equalizer)
Use to change the tonal qualities of your listening room
when the unit is mounted on the wall.
Choices: MOUNTING (Mount type),
REFLECTING (Reflectivity type)
MOUNTING (Mounting type)
Use to enhance medium to low range sounds.
Choices: WALL (Wall mount), SHELF (Shelf mount)
• Select WALL if this unit is mounted on the wall in your
listening room.
• Select SHELF if this unit is mounted on the shelf in
your listening room.
REFLECTING (Reflectivity type)
Use to select the reflectivity of your listening room.
Choices: NORMAL (Normal), HI ECHO (High echo)
• Select NORMAL if your listening room has a normal
reflectivity.
• Select HI ECHO if your listening room has highly
reflective surfaces such as concrete walls.
■ DD/DTS Dynamic Range
(Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and
DTS signals)
Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression.
This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding
Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Dynamic range is the
difference between the smallest sound that can be heard
above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound
that can be heard without distortion.
Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),
MAX (maximum)
Select to adjust the dynamic range compression.
• Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume
levels.
• Select STD for general use.
• Select MAX for feature films.
■ TruBass
Use to turn on or off the bass sound enhancer. The SRS
TruBass technology improves bass even without a
subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence
of a subwoofer.
Choices: OFF, ON
TruBass is not available when My Beam (see page 61) or My
Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode.
AUDIO DELAY;;;;;0msec
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p
p
D)AUDIO DELAY
MOUNTING;;;;;SHELF
REFLECTING;;;NORMAL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
E
)ROOM EQ
p
p
.
p
p
Note
MIN STD MAX
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p
p
F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range
p
OFF ON
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p
p
G)TruBass
p
80 En
MANUAL SETUP
Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to
the audio and video input.
SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → INPUT MENU
“F) XM ANTENNA LEVEL” is for U.S.A. and Canada models
only.
■ INPUT ASSIGNMENT (Input assignment)
Use to assign the HDMI IN jacks of this unit to other
components if the initial settings of this unit do not
correspond to your needs. By assigning other components
to the HDMI IN jacks of this unit, you can display the
names of the connected components in the front panel
display and OSD and operate the components with the
input selector buttons of the same name. If you connect a
component to one of the HDMI IN jacks of this unit and
do not assign a name to it, the default component name for
HDMI IN jack is displayed in the front panel and OSD
when selected.
• Select HDMI1 to assign a component to the HDMI
AUX 1 IN jack of this unit.
Choices: TV/STB, AUX1
• Select HDMI2 to assign a component to the HDMI
DVD IN jack of this unit.
Choices: DVD, AUX2
■ INPUT MODE (Input mode)
Use to designate the input mode for the input sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on
the power of this unit. For information on the types of
audio signals that can be output by this unit, see “Selecting
the input mode” on page 87.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select AUTO to set this unit to automatically detect the
type of input signals and select the appropriate input
mode.
• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the
last input mode used for that input source. If the type of
input signals is different from the setting, no sounds
will be produced.
■ INPUT TRIM (Input trim)
Use to adjust the input level of the input source.
• Select TV/STB ANALOG to adjust the level of audio
and video signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT
jacks of this unit.
Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Initial setting: –3.0 dB
• Select TV/STB DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio
and video signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL
DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit.
Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Initial setting: –3.0 dB
• Select DVD DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and
video signals input at the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL
INPUT jack of this unit.
Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Initial setting: –3.0 dB
INPUT MENU
Note
A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT
B)INPUT MODE
C)INPUT TRIM
D)INPUT RENAME
E)HDMI SET
F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
3)INPUT MENU
.
p
p
HDMI
HDMI1;;;; AUX1
( AUX1 )
HDMI2;;;; DVD
( DVD )
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT
p
p
.
p
p
AUTO LAST
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p
p
B)INPUT MODE
p
TV/STB ANALOG;;;-3.0dB
DIGITAL;;-3.0dB
DVD DIGITAL;;-3.0dB
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
C)INPUT TRIM 1/2
p
p
.
p
p
81 En
MANUAL SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
• Select AUX1 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and
video signals input at the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks
of this unit.
Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Initial setting: –3.0 dB
• Select AUX1 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and
video signals input at the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL
INPUT jack of this unit.
Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Initial setting: –3.0 dB
• Select AUX2 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and
video signals input at the AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL
INPUT jack of this unit.
Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Initial setting: –3.0 dB
• Select AUX3 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio
signals input at the AUX 3 input jack on the front
panel.
Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Initial setting: –3.0 dB
• Select DOCK ANALOG to adjust the level of audio
signals input at the DOCK terminal of this unit
(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only).
Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB
Initial setting: –3.0 dB
■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename)
Use to change the name of the input source in the OSD
and the front panel display. Press an input selector button
(e.g., DVD) to select the component you want to change
the name for and perform the following procedure.
1 Press / to place the _ (underscore) under
the space or the character you want to edit.
The _ (underscore) flashes.
2 Press / to select the desired character.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
• Press to change the character in the following
order or press to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *,
+, etc.
3 Repeat steps 1 to 2 to rename each input.
4 Press ENTER to exit.
The new names are registered, and the display returns
to the previous screen.
■ HDMI SET (HDMI settings)
Use to change the HDMI audio/video output/input to
match the connected component.
Choices: SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio),
VIDEO INFO (Video information),
HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control)
DVD -> DVD
[ ]/[ ]:Position
[ ]/[ ]:Character
[ENTER]:Return
D)INPUT RENAME
p
p
p
p
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
E)HDMI SET
p
p
a)SUPPORT AUDIO
b)VIDEO INFO
c)HDMI CONTROL
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
.
82 En
MANUAL SETUP
SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio)
Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on
this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the
HDMI OUT jack of this unit.
Choices: YSP-3000, OTHER
• This setting is effective when HDMI CONTROL is set to OFF
(see right).
• When HDMI CONTROL is set to ON, this setting is ineffective.
This unit follows the settings of the HDMI control-compatible
TV.
• The HDMI video signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks of
this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.
VIDEO INFO (Video information)
Use to display the video information of the current input
signal.
Choices: HDMI RES., HDMI ERROR
• Select HDMI RES. to display the resolution of the
HDMI input/output signals.
• Select HDMI ERROR to display the error message for
HDMI sources or devices connected
(see page 104 for details).
HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control)
Use this function to link this unit and an HDMI control-
compatible TV via HDMI. You can turn on or off the
power, select the input mode, and adjust the volume level
of this unit using the remote control supplied with your
HDMI control-compatible TV. For details, see “Using the
HDMI control feature” on page 71.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select ON to enable the HDMI control. The signals
input at the HDMI IN jacks are output at the HDMI
OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode.
• Select OFF to disable the HDMI control. The signals
input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the HDMI
OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode.
■ XM ANTENNA LEVEL (XM antenna level)
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use to display the current reception level of the XM
Satellite Radio signals. For the best reception, orient the
connected XM Mini-Tuner Dock to obtain a value of 60%
or more.
Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%
“NONE” is displayed if the XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not
connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections
(see page 5 in the Reference Guide).
Notes
YSP-3000 OTHER
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p
p
a)SUPPORT AUDIO
p
HDMI RES.;;;;1080P
HDMI ERROR;;;----
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Return
b)VIDEO INFO
p
p
.
Note
OFF ON XXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p
p
c)HDMI CONTROL
p
XM ANTENNA LEVEL;;;;97%
[ENTER]:Return
F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL
83 En
MANUAL SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to
the display.
SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → DISPLAY MENU
■ F.DISPLAY SET
(Front panel display settings)
Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the
front panel display.
STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer)
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display
when you operate this unit by using the control buttons on
the front panel or on the remote control.
Choices: –2, –1, OFF
AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer)
If no operation is performed for a specified period of time,
the front panel display dims. Use to adjust the brightness
of the front panel display in this case.
Choices: OFF (the same brightness as the STANDARD
DIMMER setting), –1 to –3 (based on the
STANDARD DIMMER setting), DISPLAY OFF
SCROLL (Front panel display scroll)
(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)
Use to select the mode to display information in the front
panel display when operating your iPod or XM Satellite
Radio.
Choices: CONT., ONCE
• Select CONT. to continue to scroll the display.
• Select ONCE to scroll the display to the end once, after
which the first 15 characters appear and stay.
■ OSD SET (OSD settings)
Use to adjust the display position and to set the display
time of the OSD.
OSD SHIFT (OSD shift)
Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust
toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the
OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it.
Choices: –5 to +5
Initial setting: 0
OSD DISPLAY TIME (OSD display time)
(U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only)
Use to set the interval for which the OSD screen is
displayed after an operation.
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s
• Select ON to show the OSD screen constantly.
• Select 10s to turn off the OSD screen 10 seconds after
an operation.
• Select 30s to turn off the OSD screen 30 seconds after
an operation.
y
The OSD display time setting is available for your iPod and XM
Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). For details, see
pages 4 and 10 in the Reference Guide.
■ UNIT SET (Unit settings)
Use this to change the display unit of measurement.
Choices: METERS (Australia, Europe, Asia, and Korea
models), FEET (U.S.A. and Canada models)
• Select METERS to enter distances in meters.
• Select FEET to enter distances in feet.
If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may
change.
DISPLAY MENU
A)F.DISPLAY SET
B)OSD SET
C)UNIT SET
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
4)DISPLAY MENU
.
p
p
STANDARD DIMMER;;;;;OFF
AUTO DIMMER
;;;;;;;;;;;;;OFF
SCROLL;;;;;;;;;;;;CONT.
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
A)F.DISPLAY SET
p
p
.
p
p
Note
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;;;0
OSD DISPLAY TIME;;;ON
[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel
[ENTER]:Return
B)OSD SET
p
p
.
p
p
METERS FEET
[ ]/[ ]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
p
p
C)UNIT SET
p
Adjusting the audio balance
84 En
You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel by using the test tone or the audio output being played back
in each beam mode to achieve a more true-to-life surround sound experience.
You can use the test tone feature to output a test tone from
each channel to manually balance the channel levels.
Use this to set the channel levels so that the volume level
of each channel is identical when heard from your
listening position.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press TEST.
“TEST FRONT L” appears in the front panel display
and a test tone is output from the front left channel.
3 Press / to select the channel you want
to adjust.
The front panel display changes as follows:
“TEST SUBWOOFER” is only available when a subwoofer
is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS
OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 78).
4 Press / to adjust the channel volume.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Adjusting the audio balance
Using the test tone
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
CODE SET
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
TEST
TEST FRONT L
Note
ENTER
TEST FRONT L
TEST CENTER
TEST FRONT R
TEST SUR.R
TEST SUR.L
TEST SUBWOOFER
ENTER
85 En
Adjusting the audio balance
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
5 Press TEST when you have completed all
your adjustments.
• All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or 5-
channel stereo playback (see page 60), My Beam (see page 61),
or My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode.
• “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is
selected as the beam mode (see page 55).
• “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the
settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or
stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 55 and
60).
y
If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB”
appears in the front panel display.
You can also manually adjust the channel levels while
playing back an input source such as a DVD.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press CH LEVEL repeatedly (or press
CH LEVEL and / ) to select the channel
you want to adjust.
The front panel display changes as follows.
“SWFR” is available only when a subwoofer is connected to
this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND
MENU (see page 78).
Notes
Using the audio output being
played back
TEST
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
CODE SET
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Note
YSP
TV/AV
CH LEVEL
ENTER
CH LEVEL
FRONT L +1.0dB
CENTER -2.5dB
FRONT R +1.0dB
SUR.R +2.0dB
SUR.L +2.0dB
SWFR --dB
or
86 En
Adjusting the audio balance
3 Press / to adjust the channel volume.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
4 Wait for a few seconds without operating this
unit when you have completed your
adjustment.
• All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or 5-
channel stereo playback (see page 60), or My Surround (see
page 55) is selected as the beam mode.
• “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is
selected as the beam mode (see page 55).
• Only CENTER can be adjusted when My Beam is selected as
the beam mode (see page 61).
• “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the
settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or
stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 55 and
60).
y
If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB”
appears in the front panel display.
Notes
ENTER
Selecting the input mode
87 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can select the type of audio input signals of the selected input source according to your preference or the conditions
of the input source. This function is available for TV/STB, DVD, AUX1, and AUX2.
y
We recommend setting the input mode to AUTO in most cases.
1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
2 Press one of the input selector buttons to
select the desired input source.
3 Press INPUTMODE repeatedly to toggle
between input modes.
ANALOG is not available as the input mode of DVD and
AUX2.
•AUTO
Automatically selects audio input signals in the following
priority order:
1) HDMI
2) Digital
3) Analog
y
Use this input mode in most cases.
•DTS
Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS.
Compared to AUTO, this input mode provides greater
stability while playing back CDs or LDs encoded in DTS.
• ANALOG
Selects only analog signals.
Even when both digital and analog signals are input
simultaneously, only analog signals are selected.
y
You can adjust the default input mode to be selected when the
power of this unit is turned on by adjusting INPUT MODE in
INPUT MENU (see page 80).
Selecting the input mode
STEREO
MY BEAM MY SUR.
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
DOCK
+10
0
789
5
AV
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
YSP
TV/AV
AUX2AUX1DVD
STB
TV
Note
TV/STB AUTO
TV/STB DTS
TV/STB ANALOG
DVD AUTO
DVD DTS
AUX1 AUTO
AUX1 DTS
AUX1 ANALOG
INPUTMODE
When TV or STB is selected
as the input source
When DVD is selected
as the input source
When AUX1 is selected
as the input source
AUX2 AUTO
AUX2 DTS
When AUX2 is selected
as the input source
Adjusting the system parameters
88 En
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to
adjust and customize the way this unit operates.
When “F.PANEL KEY” is set to “F.PANEL: OFF” (see page 93), STANDBY/ON on the front panel is ineffective. Use STANDBY/ON
on the remote control instead to adjust the system parameters.
Follow the procedure below to enter the system
parameters.
1 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to
turn off the power of this unit.
2 Press and hold INPUT on the front panel and
press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to
turn on the power of this unit.
“MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front
panel display.
3 Release INPUT on the front panel.
Adjusting the system parameters
Note
Using the system parameters
STANDBY/ON
VOLUME
+
INPUT
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
ENTER
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
AV
STANDBY/ON
INPUT
STANDBY/ON
MEMORY PROTECT
INPUT
89 En
Adjusting the system parameters
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can protect the settings you saved in the system
memory of this unit from being accidentally erased or
unwantedly changed.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system
parameters” on page 88.
2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
3 Confirm that “MEMORY PROTECT” is
displayed in the front panel display and
press ENTER.
4 Press / to switch between “PROTECT:
ON” and “PROTECT: OFF”.
• Select PROTECT: ON to activate the protection
feature.
• Select PROTECT: OFF to deactivate the protection
feature.
5 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to
set this unit to the standby mode.
The new setting will be activated when you turn on
the power of this unit next time.
Setting the MEMORY PROTECT
YSP
TV/AV
ENTER
MEMORY PROTECT
ENTER
PROTECT: ON
PROTECT: OFF
STANDBY/ON
90 En
Adjusting the system parameters
You can set the maximum volume level so that this unit
will not output sound beyond the limited volume level.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system
parameters” on page 88.
2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
“
3 Press / so that “MAX VOLUME SET” is
displayed in the front panel display.
4 Press ENTER.
5 Press / to adjust the maximum volume
level.
Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, MIN
Control step: 1
6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to
set this unit to the standby mode.
The new setting for the maximum volume level will
be activated when you turn on the power of this unit
next time.
You can set the initial volume level when the power of this
unit is turned on.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system
parameters” on page 88.
2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
Setting the MAX VOLUME
YSP
TV/AV
ENTER
MAX VOLUME SET
ENTER
Setting the TURN ON VOLUME
ENTER
STANDBY/ON
YSP
TV/AV
91 En
Adjusting the system parameters
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
3 Press / so that “TURN ON VOLUME” is
displayed in the front panel display.
4 Press ENTER.
5 Press / to adjust the initial volume level.
Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, OFF
Control step: 1
6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to
set this unit to the standby mode.
The new setting for the maximum volume level will
be activated when you turn on the power of this unit
next time.
You can test the sound beam output from this unit to
experience the sound beam.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system
parameters” on page 88.
2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
3 Press / so that “DEMO MODE” is
displayed in the front panel display.
4 Press ENTER.
ENTER
TURN ON VOLUME
ENTER
ENTER
STANDBY/ON
Setting the DEMO MODE
YSP
TV/AV
ENTER
DEMO MODE
ENTER
92 En
Adjusting the system parameters
5 Press / to switch between “DEMO: ON”
and “DEMO: OFF”.
• Select DEMO: ON to activate the demo mode.
• Select DEMO: OFF to deactivate the demo mode.
6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to
set this unit to the standby mode.
The new setting will be activated when you turn on
the power of this unit next time.
Press ENTER while playing back sources to test the
sound beam.
The sound beam being output shuttles between left
and right. Press ENTER again to stop shuttling.
You can disable the INPUT on the front panel when you
adjust the system parameters.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system
parameters” on page 88.
2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
3 Press / so that “PANEL INPUT KEY” is
displayed in the front panel display.
4 Press ENTER.
ENTER
DEMO: ON
DEMO: OFF
STANDBY/ON
Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY
YSP
TV/AV
ENTER
PANEL INPUT KEY
ENTER
93 En
Adjusting the system parameters
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
5 Press / to switch between “P.INPUT: ON”
and “P.INPUT: OFF”.
• Select P.INPUT: ON to enable the INPUT key on
the front panel.
• Select P.INPUT: OFF to disable the INPUT key on
the front panel. “F.PANEL KEY” is automatically
set to “ON”.
6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to
set this unit to the standby mode.
The new setting will be activated when you turn on
the power of this unit next time.
You can disable the front panel keys except when you
adjust the system parameters.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system
parameters” on page 88.
2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
3 Press / so that “F.PANEL KEY” is
displayed in the front panel display.
4 Press ENTER.
ENTER
P.INPUT: ON
P.INPUT: OFF
STANDBY/ON
Disabling the front panel keys
YSP
TV/AV
ENTER
F.PANEL KEY
ENTER
94 En
Adjusting the system parameters
5 Press / to switch between “F.PANEL:
ON” and “F.PANEL: OFF”.
• Select F.PANEL: ON to enable the front panel
keys.
• Select F.PANEL: OFF to disable the front panel
keys. “P.INPUT” is automatically set to “ON”.
6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to
set this unit to the standby mode.
The new setting will be activated when you turn on
the power of this unit next time.
You can reset all of the parameters of this unit to the
factory presets. This procedure completely resets ALL the
parameters in SET MENU.
After performing the following procedure you must run AUTO
SETUP again to match your surround sound environment.
1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system
parameters” on page 88.
2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
3 Press / so that “FACTORY PRESET” is
displayed in the front panel display.
4 Press ENTER.
ENTER
F.PANEL: ON
F.PANEL: OFF
STANDBY/ON
Setting the FACTORY PRESET
Note
YSP
TV/AV
ENTER
FACTORY PRESET
ENTER
95 En
Adjusting the system parameters
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
5 Press / to switch between “PRESET:
RESET” and “PRESET: CANCEL”.
• Select PRESET: RESET to reset all of the current
settings.
• Select PRESET: CANCEL to cancel the resetting
procedure.
6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to
set this unit to the standby mode.
The new setting will be activated when you turn on
the power of this unit next time.
ENTER
PRESET: RESET
PRESET:CANCEL
STANDBY/ON
Remote control features
96 En
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other AV components made by Yamaha and other
manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control
codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/AV to change the control area.
Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if
a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control.
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, STB, and TV).
For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer
to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of
the input selector buttons to select the input
source you want to set a remote control code
for.
The transmission indicator flashes twice and remains
lit.
Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.
2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the
remote control code while holding down
CODE SET.
3 Refer to “Controlling other components” on
page 97 to operate the external component
using the remote control.
If the external component functions correctly the
remote control code setup is successful.
If the external component does not function correctly,
the remote control code may be incorrect. Confirm
that the remote control code is correct. See “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual and
start over from step 1.
If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
Remote control features
Note
Setting remote control codes
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
CODE SET
STEREO
MY BEAM MY SUR.
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER
SUR. DECODEOFF
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
DOCK
+10
0
789
5
AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Transmission indicator
TV MUTE
CODE SET
While holding
down, press
AUX2AUX1DVD
STB
TV
Note
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
two minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries and reset the remote control codes.
When changing the batteries, be careful not to press
any of the buttons on the remote control. Doing so will
clear the contents of the memory.
6
9
9
SPORTS
MY SUR.
SPORTS
Setting example: Yamaha DVD input area
TV MUTE
CODE SET
While holding
down, press
97 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Operating your TV
Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV, and
press TV to select TV as the input source.
The control area of the remote control changes to the TV
operation mode.
1 Numeric buttons
Selects a TV channel for playback.
2 CH +/–
Switches between the available TV channels.
3 TV INPUT
Switches the input source for your TV.
4 TV POWER
Turns on or off the power of your TV.
5 TV INPUT1
Selects the input source of your TV.
6 TV VOL +/–
Adjusts the audio output level of your TV.
7 TV MUTE
Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV.
Controlling other components
TV
YSP
TV/AV
STEREO
MY BEAM MY SUR.
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER
MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
CODE SET
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
CH
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
+10
0
78
9
5
AV
YSP
TV/AV
CAT/
A-E
ENTRY
1
4
7
5
3
2
6
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
98 En
Remote control features
■ Operating your DVD player/recorder
Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and
press DVD to select DVD as the input source.
The control area of the remote control changes to the DVD
operation mode.
1 Numeric buttons
Enter numeric digits.
2 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER
Use to select DVD menu items.
3 Operation buttons for DVD players
Operate your DVD player/recorder, such as play and stop.
4 AV POWER
Turns on or off the power of your DVD player/recorder.
5 MENU
Displays the DVD menu.
6 RETURN
Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit
from the DVD menu.
■ Operating your STB
(CATV/Satellite tuner)
Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and
press STB to select STB as the input source.
The control area of the remote control changes to the STB
operation mode.
1 Numeric buttons
Enter numeric digits.
2 CH +/–
Switches between the available STB channels.
3 AV POWER
Turns on or off the power of your STB.
DVD
YSP
TV/AV
STEREO
MY BEAM MY SUR.
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER
MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
CODE SET
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
CH
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
+10
0
78
9
5
AV
YSP
TV/AV
CAT/
A-E
ENTRY
1
2
5
6
3
4
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
STB
YSP
TV/AV
STEREO
MY BEAM MY SUR.
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER
MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
CODE SET
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
CH
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
+10
0
789
5
AV
YSP
TV/AV
CAT/
A-E
ENTRY
1
2
3
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
99 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Operating your VCR
Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and
press AUX1 to select VCR as the input source.
The control area of the remote control changes to the
AUX1 operation mode.
y
This operation is available when your VCR is connected to the
AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit.
1 Numeric buttons
Enter numeric digits.
2 CH +/–
Switches between the available VCR channels.
3 Operation buttons for VCR
Operate your VCR, such as play and stop.
4 AV POWER
Turns on or off the power of your VCR.
AUX1
YSP
TV/AV
STEREO
MY BEAM MY SUR.
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER
MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
CODE SET
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
CH
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
+10
0
78
9
5
AV
YSP
TV/AV
CAT/
A-E
ENTRY
2
3
4
1
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
100 En
Remote control features
The TV macro feature makes it possible to perform a
series of operations with the press of a single button. For
example, when you want to play a DVD, you would
normally turn on the component, select DVD as the input
source, and press the play button to start playback. The TV
macro feature lets you perform all of these operations
simply by pressing the DVD macro button.
• Be sure to set up a remote control code for your TV before
setting macros.
• The ways to set macros differ if your TV does not have the
tuning capability.
• If you press any control buttons on the remote control other than
the ones used to set macros while setting macros, the setting
procedure is automatically canceled.
• If it takes more than 10 seconds in steps 2 and 3, the setting
procedure is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat from
step 1.
■ Setting macros for the TV with the
tuning capability
1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of
the input selector buttons to select the input
source you want to set macros for.
Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.
2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE
SET.
3 Press CH +/– or the numeric buttons to select
the TV channel.
Check that the TV screen changes to the tuner screen.
4 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen
changes to the display of the input source
selected in step 1.
5 Press ENTER to confirm the macro setting.
Using the TV macro
Notes
STEREO MY SUR.
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
SUR. DECODE
OFF
CODE SET
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
+10
0
78
9
5
AV
YSP
TV/AV
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
TV MUTE
CODE SET
AUX2AUX1DVD
STB
While holding
down, press
TV MUTE
CODE SET
MACRO
While holding
down, press
CH
2
1
STEREO
OFF
3
4
56
789
0
+10
5BEAM
ST+3BEAM
3BEAM
MY SUR.
MY BEAM
MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS
or
TV INPUT
ENTER
101 En
Remote control features
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
■ Setting macros for the TV without the
tuning capability
1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of
the input selector buttons to select the input
source you want to set macros for.
Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.
2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE
SET.
3 Press INPUT1.
Check that the TV screen changes to the input 1
screen.
4 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen
changes to the display of the input source
selected in step 1.
5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting.
■ Operating macros
Press and hold one of the input selector buttons
for approximately two seconds to select the input
source you want to operate macros for.
The TV input changes at the same time the input mode
changes.
■ Canceling the macros
1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of
the input selector buttons to select the input
source you want to cancel the macros for.
Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET.
2 Press MACRO while holding down CODE
SET.
3 Press ENTER to cancel the macros.
TV MUTE
CODE SET
While holding
down, press
AUX2AUX1DVD
STB
TV MUTE
CODE SET
MACRO
While holding
down, press
INPUT1
TV INPUT
ENTER
AUX2AUX1DVD
STB
TV MUTE
CODE SET
While holding
down, press
AUX2AUX1DVD
STB
TV MUTE
CODE SET
MACRO
While holding
down, press
ENTER
Troubleshooting
102 En
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and
contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ General
Troubleshooting
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn on
when STANDBY/ON is
pressed, or enters the
standby mode soon after the
power has been turned on.
The AC power supply cable is not firmly
connected to the AC wall outlet.
Connect the AC power supply cable firmly
to the AC wall outlet.
29
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect
the AC power supply cable, plug it back in
after 30 seconds, and use it normally.
—
This unit suddenly enters the
standby mode.
The internal temperature becomes too high
and the overheat protection circuitry has
been activated.
Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool
down and turn it back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source
again.
—
No sound. Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
19
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with
INPUT or the input selector buttons.
45
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
47
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume
audio output and adjust the volume level.
47
The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such
as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz of
sampling frequency) are being received
from the source component.
Play a source whose signals can be
reproduced by this unit.
—
Change the system settings of the source
component.
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect the HDMI components that support
the HDCP copy protection standards.
20
SUPPORT AUDIO is set to OTHER and
HDMI audio signals are not being played
back on this unit.
Set SUPPORT AUDIO to YSP-3000 in
MANUAL SETUP
82
The sound suddenly goes
off.
The sleep timer has turned this unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source
again.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume
audio output and adjust the volume level.
47
No sound from the effect
channels.
You are playing back the source or program
in the 2-channel stereo playback or My
Beam mode.
Press one of the beam mode buttons on the
remote control to select a multi-channel
playback mode and play back the source or
program once more.
54
No sound from the center
channel.
The output level of the center channel is set
to minimum.
Raise the level of the center channel.
84
No sound from the surround
channels.
The output level of the surround channels is
set to minimum.
Raise the output level of the surround
channels.
84
103 En
Troubleshooting
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
No sound from the
subwoofer.
BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET is set to
FRONT.
Select SWFR.
78
The source does not contain low bass signals.
Distorted or too little bass
sound.
CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set
incorrectly.
Set CROSS OVER correctly.
78
One of the night listening enhancers is
currently selected.
Turn off the night listening enhancers.
67
Too much bass sound. TruBass is currently turned on. Turn off TruBass.
79
The volume level of the subwoofer is too high.
Turn down the volume level of the subwoofer.
—
Surround sound effects are
insubstantial.
The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular
shaped room.
—
There is no wall in the path of the sound
beam.
Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in
the path of the sound beam.
—
Dolby Digital or DTS sources
cannot be played back.
(Dolby Digital or DTS
indicator does not light up in
the front panel display.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the
operating instructions for your component.
—
The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO.
87
There is noise interference
when a subwoofer is not
connected to this unit.
The protection circuitry was in operation
because a source with strong bass elements
was played back.
Turn down the volume level.
47
Select SWFR for BASS OUT.
78
Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for
SUBWOOFER SET.
78
Low-frequency sounds are
distorted.
CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set
incorrectly.
Set CROSS OVER correctly.
78
On-screen display does not
appear.
The OSD video pin cable is not connected
properly.
Connect the cable properly.
22
This unit does not operate
properly.
The internal microcomputer has been frozen
by an external electric shock (such as
lightning or excessive static electricity) or
by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power supply cable from
the outlet and plug it in again after about 30
seconds.
—
No sound is heard from the
TV connected via HDMI.
The TV does not accept the multi-channel
audio signals.
Convert the multi-channel audio signals to
the 2-channel audio signals at the source
component such as a DVD player.
—
“SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “YSP-3000”. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “OTHER”.
82
There is noise interference
from digital or high-
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit farther away from such
equipment.
—
This unit does not output
effect sounds properly.
The original source includes surround effects.
Disable the surround effect settings of this unit.
—
My Beam auto-adjust
function does not work.
The listening room is too noisy. Keep the listening room as quiet as possible.
—
Try manual-adjust function.
62
The sound reflectivity of the listening room
is too much.
Set REFLECTING to HI ECHO.
79
The remote control may be operated outside
of the remote control operation range.
The remote control functions within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more
than 45 degrees off-axis from the front
panel.
30
The function does not work properly
because of the condition of the connected
components.
Select My Beam and then try again.
61
104 En
Troubleshooting
■ Remote control
■ HDMI
■ FM tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control does not
work and/or function
properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more
than 45 degrees off-axis from the front
panel.
30
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter
type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the
remote control sensor of this unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
30
Cannot operate external
components with the remote
control of this unit.
The external component you want to operate
is not selected as the input source.
Press INPUT on the front panel or the input
selector buttons on the remote control to
select the external component you want to
operate.
45
The remote control code was not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly or try
another code for the same manufacturer
using the “List of remote control codes” at
the end of this manual.
96
Even if the remote control code is correctly
set, there are some models that do not
respond to the remote control.
Use the remote control supplied with the
external component.
—
The cursor buttons do not
work during SET MENU
operation.
The operation mode selector was
unwantedly set to TV/AV.
Set the operation mode selector to YSP.
—
Cannot use the My Beam
auto-adjust function.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a
maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more
than 45 degrees off-axis from the front
panel.
30
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
Device Error The number of the connected HDMI
components exceeds the limit.
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI
components.
—
HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI
components support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts
may cause this problem when the
transmitter is too far away or the antenna
input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
29
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
49
There is distortion, and clear
reception cannot be obtained
even with a good FM
antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station cannot
be tuned into with the
automatic tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
49
Previously preset stations
can no longer be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a long
period.
Preset the stations again.
50
Glossary
105 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the system has
a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel).
By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more
accurate moving sound effects and surround sound
environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The
wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum
volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound
processing provide listeners with excitement and realism
previously unheard of.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up
to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for
your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology). Music and Game modes are also available for
2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode.
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a
home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of
sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital
surround in your home. This system produces practically
distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right,
and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE
0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels).
The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel
to existing 5.1-channel format.
■ DTS Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two
modes are available: Music mode for playing music
sources and Cinema mode for movies.
■ EUPHONY
Euphony is a revolutionary sound field reproduction
system implemented with state-of-the-art sound
technologies developed under the basic concept of
enjoying beautiful sound. It can reproduce surround sound
optimized without depending on the number of input
channels, the number of speakers (two or more speakers)
or the speaker’s dimensions. In addition, it features steady
center localization. It also can reproduce the surround
sound for the headphones with natural sound and “out-of-
head” localization so that the listener feels an expanded
sound and will not tire, even when listening to music or a
movie for long time.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such
as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video
monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced, or high-definition video as well as
multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI
transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-
channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure
audio/video interface that meets the security requirements
of content providers and system operators. For further
information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
Glossary
106 En
Glossary
■ LFE 0.1-channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ Neural Surround
Neural Surround
™
represents the latest advancement in
surround technology and has been adopted by XM
Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround
recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural
Surround
™
employs psychoacoustic frequency domain
processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound
stage with superior channel separation and localization of
audio elements.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted
without using any compression. This is used as a method
of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses
a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code
modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ SRS TruBass
SRS TruBass is a psychoacoustic bass enhancement
technology developed by SRS Labs, Inc. for speakers and
headphone systems that delivers bass up to an octave
below the physical capabilities of the speaker’s driver.
SRS TruBass technology takes advantage of a
spontaneous tendency of the human ears to infer low-
range audio data when presented with higher-frequency
harmonic signals. As a result, our ears can hear the
original low-range sound that the speaker system is
incapable of producing.
Index
107 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
■ Numerics
3 Beam............................................................................ 55
5 Beam............................................................................ 54
■ A
AC power supply cable...................................................29
Audio pin cable...............................................................20
AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).......................................... 35
■ B
Battery.............................................................................30
BEAM MENU................................................................ 74
Beam mode .........................................................54, 60, 61
■ C
Cable clamp ....................................................................20
Cardboard microphone stand.......................................... 37
CINEMA DSP ................................................................ 64
■ D
DEMO MODE................................................................91
Demonstration DVD......................................................... 6
Digital audio pin cable....................................................20
DISPLAY MENU ........................................................... 83
Dolby Digital ..................................................................56
Dolby Pro Logic..............................................................56
Dolby Pro Logic II.......................................................... 56
DTS.................................................................................56
DTS Neo: 6 ..................................................................... 56
Dynamic range................................................................79
■ E
EUPHONY ...................................................................105
■ F
FACTORY PRESET ....................................................... 94
Fastener...........................................................................18
Front panel........................................................................7
Front panel display ...........................................................8
■ H
HDMI.............................................................................. 20
HDMI cable ....................................................................20
■ I
IntelliBeam ..................................................................... 35
IntelliBeam microphone ................................................. 36
■ L
LFE 0.1-channel ........................................................... 106
■ M
MANUAL SETUP ..........................................................72
MEMORY.......................................................................42
Movie program................................................................64
Music program ................................................................64
My Beam.........................................................................61
■ N
Night listening enhancer .................................................67
■ O
On-screen display (OSD)................................................32
Optical cable ...................................................................20
OSD video pin cable .......................................................20
■ P
PCM ..............................................................................106
Power...............................................................................31
■ R
Rear panel .........................................................................9
Remote control................................................................10
Remote control code .......................................................96
Remote control sensor.....................................................30
■ S
SET MENU.....................................................................32
Sleep timer ......................................................................68
Sound field program........................................................63
Stereo plus 3 Beam .........................................................55
Surround mode................................................................56
Surround sound ...............................................................54
SOUND MENU ..............................................................78
Sports program................................................................64
Stereo sound....................................................................60
System parameter............................................................88
■ T
Test tone ..........................................................................84
TruBass............................................................................79
TV macro ......................................................................100
TV volume equal mode...................................................67
■ V
Volume ............................................................................47
Volume mode ..................................................................67
Index
Specifications
108 En
AMP SECTION
• Maximum Output Power (JEITA)
................................................. 2 W (1 kHz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 21
20 W (100 Hz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 2
SPEAKER SECTION
•Driver
Small dia. speakers
...................... 4 cm (1-9/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 21
Woofers
.................... 10 cm (3-15/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 2
Frequency response ............................................. 60 Hz to 20 kHz
(-10 dB, stereo mode)
CONNECTIONS
• Input Jacks
TV/STB, AUX 1 AUDIO IN (1 V, 32 kΩ) ........... 2 pairs (Analog)
TV/STB, AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN ........ 2 (Optical digital)
DVD, AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN ............2 (Coaxial digital)
AUX 1, DVD HDMI IN ............................................................... 2
AUX 3 .......................................................................................... 1
• Output Jacks
SUBWOOFER OUT (1.5 V, less than 120 Hz) ......1 (Subwoofer)
VIDEO OUT (1 Vp-p, 75 Ω) ............................................1 (OSD)
HDMI OUT .................................................................................. 1
• System Connector Jack
INTELLIBEAM MIC ..................................1 (Microphone input)
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia model] ............................. 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] .................................. AC 220
–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] .................... AC 220
–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Korea model] ....................................... AC 220
–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[General model] .................................... AC 110
–120 V, 50/60 Hz
[Asia model] ..........................................AC 220
–240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption ..................................................................32 W
• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.5 W or less
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 800 × 155 × 152 mm
(31-1/2 x 6-3/32 x 5-31/32 in)
• Weight .............................................................. 11.5 kg (25 lbs 6 oz)
*
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standard:
• HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System)
licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
i
List of remote control codes
TV
ADMIRAL 292, 293, 216
AIWA 294, 276, 283, 284
AKAI 295, 296
ALBA
296
AOC 297
BELL &
HOWELL 292
BESTAR 298
BLAUPUNKT 229, 222
BLUE SKY 298
BRANDT 223
BROC SONIC 297
BUSH 296
BYD:SIGN 201, 202
CLATRONIC 298
CRAIG 224
CROSLEX 225, 298
CURTIS MATHIS
297, 226
DAEWOO 297, 298, 224,
227, 228
DAYTRON 239
DUAL 298
DWIN 293, 281
EMERSON 297, 224, 239, 232
FURGUSON 223, 265, 266
FIRST LINE 298
FISHER 295, 233
FRABA 298
FUJITSU 289
FUNAI 277, 278
GE 293, 297, 234,
235, 236
GOODMANS 296, 298, 223
GRUNDIG 229, 238, 249
HITACHI 297, 239, 242,
243, 285, 206
ICE 296
IRRADIO 296
ITT/NOKIA 244, 245
JC PENNY 293, 297, 234, 237
JVC 296, 246, 247, 286
KENDO 298
KTV 297, 239
LG/GOLDSTAR
297, 298, 239, 237
LOEWE 298, 248, 207
LXI 293, 297, 225,
226, 233, 298
MAGNAVOX 297, 225, 239, 298
MARANTZ 298, 210
MATSUI 295
MEDION 203, 204, 298
MEMOREX 297, 216
MITSUBISHI 299, 297, 259, 287
NAD 226, 255
NEC 297, 252, 282
NOKIA 244, 245
NOKIA OCEANIC
245
NORDMENDE 265, 266
ONWA 296
PANASONIC 234, 235, 236,
253, 288, 211
PHILCO 297, 225, 239, 298
PHILIPS 298, 225, 205
PIONEER 226, 235, 254,
255, 268
PORTLAND 297, 256
PROSCAN 293, 221
PROSCAN 231, 241, 251
PROTON 297, 250, 260, 270
QUASAR 234, 235
RADIO SHACK299, 293, 297
RCA 293, 297, 234,
256, 257, 258, 221
RUNCO 220, 230, 271
SABA 223, 269, 265, 266
SAMPO 281, 297, 280
SAMSUNG 297, 239, 248,
262, 275
SANYO 295, 233, 279,
272, 273, 274, 212
SCHNEIDER 296
SCOTT 297
SHARP 292, 239, 232,
213, 208
SIEMENS 229
SIGNATURE 216
SIGNATURE 292
SONY 263, 214
SYLVANIA 297, 225, 298
SYNPHONIC 217, 218, 219
TELEFUNKUN269, 264, 265, 266
THOMSON 223, 266
TOSHIBA 292, 226, 267, 215
VIDECH 297, 242
WARDS 297, 239, 232, 216
YAMAHA 299, 292, 242,
285, 287, 253, 206
YAMAJI 298
ZENITH 216, 261, 271
DVD PLAYER
AIWA 648, 649
APEX DIGITAL
652, 653, 654
BYD:SIGN 678, 679
DAEWOO 655
DENON 623, 624, 682
FUNAI 625
HARMAN/KARDON
656, 657
HITACHI 626, 688, 689
JVC 627, 643, 692
KENWOOD 628
KLH 658
LG/GOLDSTAR
645, 663, 664
MARANTZ 699, 659
MITSUBISHI 629
ONKYO 632, 633, 634
PANASONIC 623, 635, 668,
672, 682, 683, 684
PHILIPS 699, 647, 659
PIONEER 636, 637, 638,
673, 674, 675, 685
686, 687
RCA 639
SAMSUNG 642
SHARP 643, 692
SONY 644, 676, 677
SYLVANIA 662
SYMPHONIC 662
THOMSON 646
TOSHIBA 634, 665, 666, 667
YAMAHA 699, 622, 623,
647, 682
ZERITH 663, 664
VCR
ADMIRAL 395
AIWA 396, 397, 398, 329
AKAI 322, 323, 324
AUDIO DYNAMIC
392, 394
BELL & HOWELL
393
BLAUPUNKT 325, 326
BROC SONIC 327
BUSH 322
CANON 325, 328
CGM 396, 332
CITIZEN 396
CRAIG 396, 363
CURTHIS MATHIS
397, 328, 333
DAEWOO 328, 334, 335
DBX 392, 394
DIMENSIA 333
DYNATECH 397
EMERSON 327, 334, 396, 397
FISHER 393, 336
FUNAI 397
GE 328, 333, 387
GO VIDEO 321, 331, 341,
351, 363
GOODMANS 334, 337
GRUNDIG 332, 338
HITACHI 325, 333, 349,
342, 343
INSTANT REPLAY
325, 328
ITT/NOKIA 393
JC PENNY 392, 393, 394,
328, 333, 349,
396, 363
JVC 392, 394, 344,
345, 346, 347
KENDO 396
KENWOOD 392, 394, 396
LG/GOLDSTAR
396, 388
LOEWE 396, 337
LUXOR 395
LXI 393, 396, 397,
336, 349
MAGNAVOX 325, 326, 328
MARANTZ 392, 394
MARTA 396
MATSUI 396
MEMOREX 328, 336, 396, 397
MINOLTA 333, 349
MITSUBISHI 399, 344, 348,
359, 353, 352
MTC 363, 397
MULTITECH 397, 348, 354
NEC 392, 394, 344, 383
NOKIA 393, 395
NOKIA OCEANIC
395
OKANO 323
OLYMPIC 325, 328
ORION 327
PANASONIC 325, 328, 339,
355, 378, 384,
385, 386
PENTAX 333, 349
PHILCO 325, 328, 397
PHILLIPS 325, 326, 328,
337, 356, 357
PHONOLA 337
PILOT 396
PIONEER 325
QUASAR 325, 328
RCA/PROSCAN
325, 326, 328,
333, 335, 349,
358, 363, 397
REALISTIC 393, 397, 328,
336, 359, 362,
396, 363
SAMSUNG 354, 358, 363,
364, 365, 366
SANSUI 394
SANYO 393, 336, 367
SCHNEIDER 337
SCOTT 399, 335, 336,
348, 359, 354,
358, 352
SELECO 322
SHARP 395, 362, 382
SIEMENS 393
SIGNATURE 2000
395, 397
SONY 368, 379, 372,
373, 374, 375
SYLVANIA 397, 325, 326, 328
SYMPHONIC 397
TANDBERG 334
TANDY 397
TASHIRO 396
TATUNG 392, 394
TEAC 392, 394, 397
TECHNICS 325, 328
TEKNIKA 396
TELEFUNKUN
376, 377
THOMAS 397
THORN 393, 396
TOSHIBA 335, 389
TOTEVISION 363, 396
UNITECH 363
UNIVERSUM 396, 327, 376
VIDEOSONIC 363
W.WHOUSE 396
WARDS 395, 396, 336,
362, 397, 363
YAMAHA 399, 392, 393, 394
ZERITH 344, 361, 368,
371, 379, 396, 397
CABLE TV TUNER
ABC 739, 752, 753,
755, 758, 759, 762
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
722, 786, 787, 788
HAMIN 723, 724, 725,
726, 727
HITACHI 722
JEROLD 722, 728, 729,
732, 733, 734,
735, 736, 737
MAGNAVOX 738
MOTOROLA 748, 728
OAK 739, 742, 743
PANASONIC 744, 745, 746,
747, 783, 784
PHILLIPS 763, 764, 765,
766, 767, 768
PIONEER 748, 785, 747
RADIO SHACK749
ii
RCA 744, 792, 793
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
752, 753, 754, 789
SONY 756, 757
TOCOM 755
UNIVERSAL 769, 772, 773,
774, 775
VIEWSTAR 764, 766, 776,
777, 778, 779, 782
SATELLITE TUNER
ECHOSTAR 822
GE 837, 838, 839
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
823
HITACHI 824
HUGHES 843, 844, 845, 846
JVC 822
MAGNAVOX 825
PANASONIC 826, 829
PHILLIPS 825, 843, 844,
845, 846, 847,
848, 849
PRIMESTAR 827
PROSCAN 837, 838, 839, 842
RADIO SHACK
828
RCA 837, 838, 839, 842
SAMSUNG 852
SKY+ 853
SKY HD 853
SONY 832, 835
TOSHIBA 833, 836
UNIDEN 825
ZENITH 834
YSP-3000
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2007 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WK75380-2
YSP-3000
Digital Sound Projector
TM
OWNER’S MANUAL
UA
00cv_YSP-3000_UA.fm Page 1 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:45 AM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
YSP-3000
Digital Sound Projector
TM
Reference Guide for iPod
TM
/XM Radio
This is the Reference Guide for Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector. This guide explains the connections and
operations of iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). Operations in this guide use keys on the
supplied remote control unless otherwise specified. For general information including the controls and functions of this
unit, refer to the owner’s manual.
y
The illustrations used in this Reference Guide are for U.S.A. and Canada models only.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
Neural Surround
™
name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation.
Using iPod™........................................................................................................................................ 2
Connection................................................................................................................................................. 2
Controlling iPod™ ....................................................................................................................................2
XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only).................................................... 5
Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock............................................................................................. 5
Activating XM™ Satellite Radio.............................................................................................................. 6
Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations .................................................................................................... 6
Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels.......................................................................................... 9
Displaying the XM™ Satellite Radio information.................................................................................. 10
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................ 11
Overview
Contents
iPod
TM
UA
USING IPOD™
2 En
This unit has the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-10, sold separately). Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock, and use the supplied remote control to
operate your iPod.
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
• The photos and video clips stored on your iPod are not displayed on your TV monitor.
Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK
terminal of this unit using a dedicated cable.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the main power
until all connections between components are complete.
y
When your iPod and external component using the AUX 3 input
jack are connected to this unit at the same time, and when the
DOCK indicator is lit in the front panel display, iPod output takes
priority.
1 Navigate through the iPod menu ( / / / ) and
starts playback (ENTER).
2 Displays the OSD (on-screen menu) menu.
3 Selects AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or
AUX3 (Australia model) as the input source.
4 Use to return to the previous iPod menu.
5 Sets the operation mode of this unit.
6 Use to return to the previous iPod menu.
7 Stops playback.
8 Pauses playback.
9 Searches forward/backward.
0 Starts playback.
A
Skips to the beginning of the current/previous/next track.
y
8 and 9 toggle between play and pause operations in the Simple
Remote mode.
Using iPod™
Notes
Connection
CAUTION
OUT
SUBWOOFER
TV/STB
AUX 1
VIDEO
DOCK
AUDIO INPUTANTENNA
Yamaha iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10, sold separately)
Rear panel of this unit
Controlling iPod™
ENHANCER
TV VOL
VOLUME
MUTE
CH LEVEL TEST
TV INPUT TV MUTE
ENTER
SUR. DECODE
OFF
CODE SET
CH
+10
0
YSP
TV/AV
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
AV
DOCK
1
2
3
6
5
7
4
8
9
0
A
(U.S.A. and Canada models)
Using iPod™
3 En
English
y
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in
“Troubleshooting” on page 11.
• While your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, your iPod battery is
automatically charged as long as this unit is turned on.
■ Controlling iPod in the Simple Remote
mode
You can perform some basic operations such as play,
pause, stop, backward/forward search, and track skip
using the remote control without the aid of the OSD. Such
basic operations can be performed also on your iPod.
1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.
2 Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada
models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set
your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock.
In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears
and the DOCK indicator lights up.
y
Use # and * on the remote control interchangeably to toggle
between play and pause operations.
Information on the current song appears only in the iPod screen
but not in the front panel display of this unit.
■ Controlling iPod in the Menu Browse
mode
You can perform the advanced operations using the remote
control with the aid of the OSD (see the owner’s manual
for information on the OSD). In the OSD, you can browse
the song list stored on your iPod. Further, you can change
or adjust the settings on your iPod as desired. Such
advanced operations cannot be performed on your iPod.
1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV.
2 Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada
models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set
your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock.
In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears
and the DOCK indicator lights up.
3 Press DISPLAY, and display the menu
browse mode.
The OSD appears on your TV.
Note
YSP
TV/AV
iPod connected
Lights up
YSP
TV/AV
iPod connected
Lights up
DISPLAY
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Settings
iPod Top
01EN_YSP-3000_UA-RG.book Page 3 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:38 AM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
Using iPod™
4 En
4 Press / and / to navigate through
the iPod menu, and press ENTER to start
playback of the selected song.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums
(albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres),
Composers (composers), Settings (settings)
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
Settings parameters:
Shuffle Shuffle
Use this function for random playback of songs or albums.
When “Songs” or “Albums” is chosen, “S” appears in the
top right corner while the songs or albums are being
shuffled. Press ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the
choices.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
• Select “Off” to deactivate this function.
• Select “Songs” for random playback of songs.
• Select “Albums” for random playback of albums.
Repeat Repeat
Use this function for repeated playback of a song or a
sequence of songs. When “One” or “All” is chosen, “R”
appears in the top right corner while a song or a sequence
of songs are being repeated. Press ENTER repeatedly to
toggle between the choices.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off” to deactivate this function.
• Select “One” for repeated playback of a song.
• Select “All” for repeated playback of a sequence of
songs.
y
• Press RETURN or MENU to go back to the previous menu.
• The information on the current song also appears in the front
panel display. You can set the front panel display mode: CONT.
or ONCE. For details, see “SCROLL” (Front panel display
scroll) in “F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in
the owner’s manual (see page 83).
• You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed
after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display
time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual (see
page 83).
• The YAMAHA logo appears in the iPod screen in this mode.
• Undisplayable characters are shown as underscores “_” in the
front panel display and OSD.
• You can change or adjust the “Settings” parameters only in the
OSD.
■ An example of the information display
during playback
1 Track number/total tracks
2 Name of the artist
3 Name of the album
4 Name of the song
5 Progress bar
6 Elapsed time
7 Shuffle and repeat icons
8 (playback), (pausing),
(search forward),
and (search backward)
9 Remaining time
ENTER
ENTER
ENTER
and
Notes
iPod[Play] S R
1/9
||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;;
0:51-7:44
FrankieZipper
Made-to-order
RoadtoIndia
8
9
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
XM™ SATELLITE RADIO TUNING (U.S.A. AND CANADA MODELS ONLY)
5 En
English
■ About XM Satellite Radio
XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk, and
entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip
hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its
passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much
more.
y
This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio
broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. See “Surround modes and recommended sources” in the
owner’s manual (see page 56).
The XM Satellite Radio service is unavailable in Alaska and Hawaii.
Connect XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (each sold
separately by XM Satellite Radio) to the XM jack on the
rear panel of this unit. For information on your XM Mini-
Tuner and Home Dock, see the operating instructions
provided with XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock.
y
• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,
the antenna of Home Dock must be placed at or near a south-
facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can
mount it indoors or outdoors.
• Use the “XM ANTENNA LEVEL” parameter in “MANUAL
SETUP” (see page 82 in the owner’s manual) to display the XM
Satellite Radio reception level (%) in the OSD. For the best
reception, adjust the orientation of the connected indoor
antenna of the Home Dock to obtain a value of 60% or more.
If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display,
Home Dock may not be connected properly to the XM jack on the
rear panel of this unit.
XM™ Satellite Radio tuning
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
XM READY
Legal Disclaimer
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply.
Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with
an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian
residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels and advertising-supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US
residents) or www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com (US residents)
and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2007 XM Satellite Radio Inc.
All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Note
Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock
DIGITAL INPUT
TV/STB
DVD
IR INXMAUX1
AUX 2
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock
(each sold separately)
Rear panel of this unit
Note
XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
6 En
Once you have installed XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,
inserted XM Mini-Tuner, connected Home Dock to your
XM READY home audio system, and installed the
antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving
XM programming. There are three places to find your
eight-character XM Radio ID: on XM Mini-Tuner, on XM
Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0 (see “All
Channel Search mode” on page 7). Record the XM Radio
ID in the following eight squares for reference.
The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S”, or “F”.
Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at
http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-
2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal
from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation
normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods
you may need to keep your XM READY home audio system on
for up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on
your XM READY home audio system, you are done. For more
information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at
http://www.xmradio.ca/ or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877-
GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677).
1 Set the operation mode selector to
TV/AV.
2 Press FM/XM repeatedly to select XM as the
input source.
In the front panel display, the XM indicator lights up
and the XM Satellite Radio information (channel
number/channel name, channel category, and artist
name/song or program title) for the currently selected
channel appears.
y
• You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to
select XM as the input source.
• When XM is selected as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously chosen channel.
Activating XM™ Satellite Radio
Note
Basic XM™ Satellite Radio
operations
STEREO
MY BEAM
PRESET/TUNE
MEMORYSEARCH
SLEEP
INPUTMODE
ENHANCER MENU
RETURNDISPLAY
TV VOL
VOLUME
ENTER
SUR. DECODEOFF
SPORTS
5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM
MY SUR.
MUSIC MOVIE
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
CATFM/XM
MACRO
TV
INPUT1
CH
ENTRY
CAT/
A-E
4
6
321
AUX1 AUX2
STB
TV
DVD
AUX3
TV
POWERPOWERSTANDBY/ON
DOCK
+10
0
789
5
AV
TV/AV
YSP
YSP
TV/AV
[001] Preview
Lights up
FM/XM
XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
7 En
English
3 Search for a desired channel by using one of
the four XM Satellite Radio search modes:
• To select a channel from all channels, see “All
Channel Search mode” on this page.
• To select a channel by channel category, see
“Category Search mode” on this page.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
“Preset Search mode” on page 8.
• To select a channel by directly entering the channel
number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on
page 8.
y
• You can preset the XM Satellite Radio channels (see page 9).
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front
panel display and/or in the OSD (see page 10).
■ All Channel Search mode
1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “ALL CH
SEARCH”.
2 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search
for an XM channel within all channels.
y
• Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search.
• To change the channel category, press CAT/A-E ( / ).
• Select channel “0” to display your XM Radio ID number.
■ Category Search mode
1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “CAT
SEARCH”.
2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change
the XM channel category.
3 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search
for an XM channel within the selected
channel category.
y
Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search.
SEARCH
ALL CH SEARCH
ENTER
ENTRY
SEARCH
CAT SEARCH
ENTER
CAT/
A-E
ENTER
ENTRY
XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
8 En
■ Preset Search mode
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset the XM channels. For details, see
“Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels” on page 9.
1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select
“PRESET SEARCH”.
2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change
the preset channel group (A to E).
3 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to
change the preset channel number (1 to 8).
y
You can also use the numeric buttons to directly input the preset
channel number.
■ Direct Number Access mode
1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select either
“ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”.
2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter
the desired three-digit XM channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
numeric buttons 1, 2, and 3.
The front panel display changes as follows:
• To enter a one- or two-digit number, press the corresponding
number button(s), and press ENTER to confirm the number. If
you do not press ENTER, this unit automatically confirms the
entered number after a few seconds.
• If you press a button other than the numeric buttons and
ENTER during this operation, the Direct Number Access mode
is canceled.
SEARCH
PRESET SEARCH
ENTER
CAT/
A-E
ENTER
ENTRY
Notes
SEARCH
ALL CH SEARCH
or
CAT SEARCH
1
5BEAM
2
ST+3BEAM
3
3BEAM
<XM> --1
<XM> -12
<XM> 123
XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
9 En
English
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 5 preset channel groups with 8
preset channel numbers each). You can then recall the
preset channels easily by selecting the preset group and
number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 8.
1 Search for an XM channel that you want to
preset.
See “Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations” on
page 6 for details.
y
The initial factory setting for all preset channels is “[001]
Preview”.
2 Press MEMORY.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for about 10 seconds.
Operate steps 3 to 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing.
3 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a
preset group while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The selected preset group appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to select
a preset number while the MEMORY indicator
is flashing.
The selected preset number appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press MEMORY or ENTER to assign the
preset group and number to the selected XM
channel while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
A colon (:) appears, and the MEMORY indicator
turns off in the front panel display.
When you overwrite an existing preset channel, the previously
stored XM channel information is cleared and updated.
Presetting the XM™ Satellite
Radio channels
Note
[043] XMU
Currently selected channel number
Flashes
MEMORY
Currently selected preset group
Flashing
ENTER
CAT/
A-E
C [043] XMU
Note
C8 [043] XMU
Currently selected preset number
Flashing
ENTER
ENTRY
Colon (:)
MEMORY
ENTER
or
C8: [043] XMU
Colon (:)
XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
10 En
You can display the XM Satellite Radio information
(channel number/channel name, channel category, and
artist name/song or program title) for the currently
selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD.
If a status or error message appears in the front panel display or in
the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada
models only)” in “Troubleshooting” on page 11.
■ Displaying the XM channel information
in the front panel display
Press DISPLAY repeatedly to toggle between the
following information displays.
When the channel number / channel name is
displayed:
When the channel category is displayed:
When the artist name / song title is displayed:
y
• You can set the front panel display mode: CONT. or ONCE.
When ONCE is selected, the front panel display scrolls
characters to the end once, after which the first 15 characters
appear and stay. See “SCROLL” (Front panel display scroll) in
“F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in the owner’s
manual (page 83).
• Undisplayable characters are displayed as spaces.
■ Displaying the XM channel information
in the OSD
Press DISPLAY.
The following screen is displayed in the OSD.
y
• To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY again.
• You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed
after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display
time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual
(page 83).
• To hold the XM Satellite Radio OSD information, press
ENTER. To unhold, press ENTER again.
• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio OSD
information screens for future reference. To view the previous
OSD screens, press RETURN repeatedly while the current XM
Satellite Radio OSD information screen is on hold.
Displaying the XM™ Satellite
Radio information
Note
Channel number / Channel name
Artist name / Song or program title
DISPLAY
Channel category
[043] XMU
<CAT>ROCK
Coldplay / Spee
XM INFORMATION
ALL CH SEARCH
XM :043
CHAN :XMU
CAT :Rock
NAME :Coldplay
TITLE:Speed of sound
.(Coldplay/Spe)
[ ]/[ ]:CHANNEL
[ ]/[ ]:CATEGORY
DISPLAY
TROUBLESHOOTING
11 En
English
Refer to the following charts when the status messages appear during your iPod or XM Satellite Radio operations on this
unit. If you experience a problem that is not listed below, or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the
standby mode, disconnect the power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
■ iPod
In case of a transmission error with no status message appearing in the front panel display and in the OSD, check the connection
between your iPod and this unit.
■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Troubleshooting
Note
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading...
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring the
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
2
Try resetting your iPod. —
Unknown iPod
Your iPod is not supported by this unit. Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
—
iPod connected
The connection between your iPod and
this unit is completed.
Disconnected
Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha
iPod universal dock.
Set your iPod back in the Yamaha iPod universal
dock.
2
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the files stored
on your iPod.
Check the playability of the files stored on your iPod. —
Store other playable music files on your iPod. —
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock are not
connected to the XM jack of this unit or
not working properly.
Check XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connections
and adjust the orientation for the best reception level.
5
UPDATING
The XM user encryption code is being
updated.
Wait until the encryption code is updated. —
NO SIGNAL
The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the indoor antenna of Home
Dock for the best reception level.
5
LOADING
It takes longer than four seconds to decode
audio or text data.
Wait until the decoding process is finished. —
OFF AIR
The currently selected XM channel is not
broadcasting signals.
Check the channel number again or select another
XM channel.
—
<XM> - - -
The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer
available.
- - - / - - -
No artist name or song title is available.
<CAT> - - -
No channel is available for the selected
category.
Select another channel category by pressing
CAT/A-E repeatedly.
7
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2007 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia
WK75460-2
01EN_YSP-3000_UA-RG.book Page 12 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:38 AM
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit.
Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC
wall outlet. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 19 to 29 in the Owner’s Manual.
YSP-3000
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
C2007 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WK75520 [En]
1
2
AUDIO INPUT
OUT
AUX 1
TV/STB
TV/STB
SUBWOOFER
AUX 1
DVD
AUX 2
VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AUDIO OUTPUT
L
R
VIDEO
INPUT
ANALOG AUDIO
OUTPUT
OPTICAL
AUDIO OUTPUT
DVD player
TV
Decide where to install this unit.
Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired
surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner.
YSP-3000
Connecting external components to this unit
Installing this unit
This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the
surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual.
Install this unit using a rack, etc.
Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before
installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first. In case you
install this unit on top of a rack, etc., use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit.
For further information on installation, see page 16 in the Owner’s Manual.
Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is
measured from the left and right corners.
Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the
adjacent walls.
40˚ to 50˚
An object, such as furniture An object, such as furniture
To the AC wall
outlet
132
Pull out the cap
before connecting
the optical cable,
and then check the
direction to insert the
cable.
Do not plug the power
supply cable into an AC
wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
1
2
Items used for connections and operations
in this guide
s
Audio pin cable (x1)
s
OSD* video pin cable (x1)
s
Optical cable (x1)
s
Digital audio pin cable (x1)
s
IntelliBeam microphone (x1)
s
Cardboard microphone stand (x1)
s
Demonstration DVD (x1)
*OSD: On-Screen Display
Connection
example 1
1. Pull out the cap
2. Check the direction
If you have connected external components,
follow the steps on the backside to start the
AUTO SETUP procedure.
Continued
on the back
Front left channel
Center channel
Front right channel
Surround left channel
Surround right channel
Front left channel
Center channel
Front right channel
Surround left channel
Surround right channel
This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to
this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the
analog/digital audio from the TV. Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video
connection between your DVD player and TV.
1
2
VIDEO
INPUT
HDMI
INPUT
HDMI
OUTPUT
HDMI
OUT
IN
DVD
AUX 1
AUDIO INPUT
OUT
AUX 1
TV/STB
TV/STB
SUBWOOFER
AUX 1
DVD
AUX 2
VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
COAXIAL
1
To the AC wall
outlet
Connect cables in the following order.
3 Install this unit in the
rack.
1 Place this unit in front of
the rack.
This connection example shows a way to make the most of the capability of this unit. You can
enjoy DVD audio and video with higher quality via the HDMI cable. In case your TV does not have
a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner, connect a digital satellite
tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner via the HDMI cable. For details, see “Connections
using HDMI cables” on page 21 in the Owner’s manual.
Connection
example 2
DVD player
TV
YSP-3000
Do not plug the power
supply cable into an AC
wall outlet until all
connections are complete.
If you have connected external components,
follow the steps on the backside to start the
AUTO SETUP procedure.
Continued
on the back
Supplied Sold separately
Connect cables in the following order.
1 OSD video pin cable
(Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV)
2 HDMI cable
(Displays the DVD digital video on the TV)
3 HDMI cable
(Inputs DVD digital audio/video signals to this unit)
2 (Sold separately) 3 (Sold separately)
2 Place this unit upside
down and connect this unit
to your TV and DVD player.
y Hint
•To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor.
•You can also use the optional metal wall bracket (sold separately) to mount this unit on the wall. For details, refer to the instructions
supplied with the metal wall bracket.
Note
Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack.
Video connection
Supplied
1 Audio pin cable
(Outputs TV analog audio sounds from this unit)
2 OSD video pin cable
(Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV)
3 Optical cable
(Outputs TV digital audio sounds from this unit)
4 Digital audio pin cable
(Outputs DVD digital audio sounds from this unit)
* The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily.
They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit.
4
4 Installation is completed.
The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack. To prevent this unit or the floor from being scratched, we recommend putting a piece of
cloth on the floor in step 2.
* The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily.
They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit.
Digital satellite tuner/Cable TV tuner/
Digital airwave tuner
Audio connection
Audio connection
HDMI connection
Subwoofer
Subwoofer
Optical cable
Note
Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD
player is turned on.
y Hint
If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible TV
(except some models) via HDMI, you can use the remote
control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power,
select the audio output component, and adjust the volume
level of this unit.
Note
Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD
player is turned on.
0726_YSP-3000_En_guide.p65 7/26/07, 4:06 PM1
Press ENTER to start the AUTO
SETUP procedure, and then
leave the room within 10 seconds.
The following screen appears on the TV. Leave the room
within 10 seconds before the AUTO SETUP procedure
starts.
The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO
SETUP procedure.
When the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed, the
following screen appears on the TV.
If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED) is displayed, see page
40 in the Owner’s Manual and then run the procedure again.
y Hint
• The result may differ depending on the environment.
• If any error occurs, the corresponding error message appears
on the screen. In this case, see “Error messages for AUTO
SETUP” on page 41 in the Owner’s Manual and then follow
the instructions. To start the AUTO SETUP procedure once
again, press RETURN.
Press ENTER.
The following screen appears on the TV for 2 seconds and
then the menu screen disappears from the TV.
Disconnect the IntelliBeam
microphone.
The AUTO SETUP has completed. Keep the IntelliBeam
microphone in a safe place.
The settings are automatically saved in the system memory.
Enjoy TV or DVD digital audio in surround sound.
For instructions on how to operate or set your TV or DVD player, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component.
Enjoying surround sound
Carry out the AUTO SETUP to adjust the settings that best match your
listening environment
The IntelliBeam technology allows you to achieve sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. It is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress.
Press STANDBY/ON on the
remote control.
The power of this unit turns on.
Before operations, insert batteries into the remote control
(see page 30 in the Owner’s Manual).
If necessary, adjust the volume level of this unit.
If you have connected the subwoofer, set the volume and
crossover/high cut frequency. Refer to the hint on page
36 in the Owner’s Manual.
Check the digital signal being output at this unit.
The input channel indicators (see page 8 in the Owner’s Manual) are lit in the front panel display, and they switch
according to the channel composition of the corresponding input source. If the sound is output from your TV
speakers, mute the volume on your TV. For details about digital audio input signals, see page 46 in the Owner’s
Manual.
Press VOLUME +/
-
on the remote control to adjust the volume
level of this unit.
Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control
to select the desired beam mode.
Select one of the six beam modes that best matches the current input source of this unit.
For further information on the beam modes, see page 54 in the Owner’s Manual.
To fine-tune the listening environment parameters manually or make advanced settings for speaker positions,
sound beams, etc., see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72 in the Owner’s Manual.
AUTO SETUP START
Will begin in 20sec
Please leave the room
**--------
[RETURN]:Cancel
10
Enjoying TV in surround sound
3
SHOW RESULT
MEASUREMENT COMPLETE
BEAM MODE :5BEAM
SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE
[ENTER]:Save set-up
[RETURN]:Do not save set-up
AUTO SETUP COMPLETE
Please remove the MIC from
the YSP and the listening
position.
TV/AV
YSP
ENTER
ENTRY
A-E
ENHANCER
DISPLAY RETURN
MENU
TV/AV
YSP
ENTER
ENTRY
A-E
ENHANCER
DISPLAY RETURN
MENU
Select the TV channel using the
remote control supplied with
your TV.
Set the operation mode selector
to YSP.
This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.
Press TV on the remote control
of this unit.
This unit switches to the TV playback mode.
More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft)
Within 1 m
(3.3 ft)
IntelliBeam
microphone
Cardboard
microphone
stand
Listening
position
Place the IntelliBeam microphone on
the extended center line of this unit
and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from
it. Also, make sure place the
IntelliBeam microphone within 1 m
(3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center
height of this unit.
IntelliBeam
microphone
Center line
Carry out the AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)
INTELLIBEAM MIC
1234
Set the IntelliBeam microphone at your normal listening position.
Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would
be when you are seated.
IntelliBeam microphone (supplied)
Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC
jack on the front panel.
You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand for the AUTO SETUP. Assemble the stand and place the IntelliBeam
microphone on top of it as shown below.
3
MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE
VOLUME CH TV VOL
Enjoying DVDs in surround sound
Select the DVD video input on
your TV.
Set the operation mode selector
to YSP.
This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.
1) Press DVD on the remote
control of this unit.
This unit switches to the DVD playback mode.
2)
Play back the supplied demonstration
DVD on the DVD player.
Set the operation mode selector
to YSP.
This unit switches to the YSP operation mode.
Press and hold AUTO SETUP for
more than 2 seconds.
The menu screen appears on the TV.
If the menu screen does not appear, check the OSD video
pin cable (see the connection example on the front page).
Check the following points.
About the IntelliBeam microphone
• Is the microphone placed on an imaginary center line drawn
from this unit?
• Is the microphone placed within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower
from the center height of this unit?
• Is the microphone placed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the
front of this unit?
About the room environment
• Is your listening room kept as quiet as possible?
Prepare to leave the room.
The best setting may not be done if you are in the room.
Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after pressing
ENTER in step 10.
y Hint
• When leaving the room, bring this guide with you.
• Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP procedure.
• The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes.
• To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started,
press RETURN.
Turn on the power of your TV.
Select the appropriate video
input on your TV.
“YSP-3000” appears on your TV. If the OSD video pin cable
is connected to the video input 1 on the TV as shown in the
connection example, switch the video input to “1”.
4
5
Within 1 m
(3.3 ft)
TV/AV
YSP
ENTER
ENTRY
A-E
ENHANCER
DISPLAY RETURN
MENU
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION & CHECK
Please connect the MIC.
Please place the MIC at least
1.8m/6ft away from the YSP
unit. The MIC should be set
at ear level when seated.
After [ENTER] is pressed,
please leave the room.
[ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel
Measurement takes about 3min.
231
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
INPUTMODE
SLEEP
5BEAM 3BEAMST+3BEAM
A-E
PRESET/TUNE
SEARCH MEMORY
FM
1
2
6
7
8
9
11
12
INTELLIBEAM MIC
TV/AV
YSP
ENTER
A-E
DISPLAY RETURN
TV/AV
YSP
ENTER
A-E
DISPLAY RETURN
AUX1 AUX2 AUX3
DVD
STB
TV
TV
INPUT1
PRESET/TUNE
SEARCH MEMORY
MACRO
231
VOL MODE
AUTO
SETUP
INPUTMODE
SLEEP
5BEAM 3BEAMST+3BEAM
STB
TV
TV
INPUT1
A-E
PRESET/TUNE
SEARCH MEMORY
MACRO
FM
231
64
5
5BEAM
STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR.
3BEAMST+3BEAM
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
Cardboard
microphone stand
Upper bound
position of the
microphone
Lower bound position
of the microphone
AUX1 AUX2 AUX3
DVD
POWER POWERSTANDBY/ON
TV
TV
AV
INPUT1 MACRO
VOLUME
MIN MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN MAX
Subwoofer
Center height of
this unit
Continued from the front
Cardboard microphone stand (supplied)
Input channel indicators
0726_YSP-3000_En_guide.p65 7/26/07, 4:06 PM2
Transcripción de documentos
00cv_YSP-3000_UA.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 2, 2007 11:19 AM UA YSP-3000 YSP-3000 Digital Sound ProjectorTM © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WK75380 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. ■ Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Read these instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or groundingtype plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power supply cable or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. i En IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: 2. IMPORTANT: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, Yamaha and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. ii En CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. Caution: Read this before operating this unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above (or below) this unit – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power supply cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power supply cable disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the power supply cable from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 21 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. WARNING THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE OF THIS UNIT MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MAIN SOCKET OUTLET VIA A PROTECTIVE EARTHING CONNECTION. 2 This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the AC wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off by STANDBY/ON. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. FOR U.K. CUSTOMERS If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note that the plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Make sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in standby mode, and disconnect the power supply cable from the wall outlet. 18 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature changes suddenly. Disconnect the power supply cable from the outlet, then leave the unit alone. 19 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm. Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling. 20 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. iii En CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Contents Overview ................................................................. 2 Features .................................................................. 3 Using this manual .................................................. 5 Supplied accessories .............................................. 6 Controls and functions .......................................... 7 Enjoying surround sound ....................................54 5 Beam .................................................................... 54 Stereo plus 3 Beam ................................................. 55 3 Beam .................................................................... 55 My Surround ........................................................... 55 Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound ...... 57 Enjoying TV in surround sound ............................. 58 Adjusting surround mode parameters ..................... 59 Enjoying stereo sound ..........................................60 PREPARATION 2-channel stereo playback ....................................... 60 5-channel stereo playback ....................................... 60 Installation ............................................................ 16 Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) ..............61 Before installing this unit ........................................ 16 Installing this unit ................................................... 16 Using auto-adjust function ...................................... 61 Using manual-adjust function ................................. 62 Connections .......................................................... 19 Using sound field programs .................................63 Getting started ..................................................... 30 Using SET MENU ................................................ 32 Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) ................ 32 The flow chart of SET MENU ................................ 33 Changing OSD language ..................................... 34 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) .............................. 35 Using the system memory ................................... 42 Convenient usage of the system memory ............... 42 Saving settings ........................................................ 42 Loading settings ...................................................... 43 BASIC OPERATION Playback ............................................................... 45 FM tuning ............................................................. 48 FM controls and functions ...................................... 48 Automatic tuning .................................................... 49 Adjusting the audio balance ................................84 Using the test tone .................................................. 84 Using the audio output being played back .............. 85 Selecting the input mode ......................................87 Adjusting the system parameters .......................88 Using the system parameters .................................. 88 Setting the MEMORY PROTECT ......................... 89 Setting the MAX VOLUME ................................... 90 Setting the TURN ON VOLUME .......................... 90 Setting the DEMO MODE ..................................... 91 Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY ........................... 92 Disabling the front panel keys ................................ 93 Setting the FACTORY PRESET ............................ 94 Remote control features .......................................96 Setting remote control codes .................................. 96 Controlling other components ................................ 97 Using the TV macro ............................................. 100 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Troubleshooting ..................................................102 Glossary ...............................................................105 Index ....................................................................107 Specifications ......................................................108 List of remote control codes ...........................................i 1 En English Selecting the input source ....................................... 45 Playing back sources ............................................... 46 Adjusting the volume .............................................. 47 Using MANUAL SETUP ....................................... 73 BEAM MENU ........................................................ 74 SOUND MENU ...................................................... 78 INPUT MENU ........................................................ 80 DISPLAY MENU ................................................... 83 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The flow chart of AUTO SETUP ........................... 35 Installing the IntelliBeam microphone ................... 36 Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ....................... 37 MANUAL SETUP ................................................72 ADVANCED OPERATION Installing batteries in the remote control ................ 30 Operation range of the remote control .................... 30 Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode ................................................ 31 ADVANCED OPERATION BASIC OPERATION SETUP CINEMA DSP programs ........................................ 64 Using the music enhancer ....................................66 Using the volume mode (Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode) 67 Using the sleep timer ............................................68 Displaying the input source information ............70 Using the HDMI control feature .........................71 SETUP Before connecting components ............................... 20 Connections using HDMI cables ............................ 21 Connecting a TV ..................................................... 22 Connecting a DVD player/recorder ........................ 23 Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner ............................................................................. 24 Connecting a digital airwave tuner ......................... 25 Connecting a portable audio player ........................ 26 Connecting other external components .................. 27 Connecting a subwoofer ......................................... 28 Connecting the FM antenna .................................... 29 About the IR IN terminal (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ...................... 29 Connecting the AC power supply cable ................. 29 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................ 7 Front panel display ................................................... 8 Rear panel ................................................................. 9 Remote control (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models) ..... 10 Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models) ......... 13 Manual tuning ......................................................... 49 Automatic preset tuning .......................................... 50 Manual preset tuning .............................................. 51 Selecting a preset station ........................................ 52 Displaying the Radio Data System information (Europe model only) ........................................... 52 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Overview Overview It is generally accepted that in order to fully enjoy the benefits of surround sound at home, you must endure the agony of wiring and installing a great number of speakers in the hope that your listening room will give you the same kind of surround sound experience as your local movie theater. Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector challenges this preconception that complicated speaker setup and troublesome wiring go hand-in-hand with the enjoyment of multi-channel surround sound. This slimline unit does away with the need for complicated wiring and installation worries, leaving you with a unit that is not only easy to set up, but is also capable of reproducing the kind of powerful surround sound you have been waiting for from its built-in 2 woofers and 21 full-range small speakers. You can fine-tune the parameters of this unit to adjust the delay time for separate sound beams, resulting in highly directional sound that comes in on the listening position from all directions. The YSP-3000 projects sound beams containing surround sound information for the front right (R), front left (L), surround right (SR), and surround left (SL) speaker positions, which are reflected off the walls of your listening room before reaching the actual listening position. With the addition of center (C) sound beams, this Digital Sound Projector creates true-to-life 5.1-channel surround sound that makes you feel as if there are actual speakers around the room. Sit back and enjoy the real sound experience of this simple, yet stylish Digital Sound Projector. Imaginary front right speaker R C SR L SL Imaginary surround right speaker Imaginary front left speaker Imaginary center speaker Listening position Imaginary surround left speaker 2 En Features Features My Surround In addition to the above mentioned beam modes, this unit is equipped with My Surround beam mode that allows you to enjoy surround system even in a small listening area. My Surround is a function integrated and optimized with DiMAGIC’s Euphony technology and Yamaha’s Beam reproduction system. My Beam This unit employs My Beam that ensures a clear sound in a noisy environment. You can adjust the beam angle manually or automatically using the supplied remote control to the maximum of 45°, rightward and leftward. Cinema DSP This unit employs the Cinema DSP technology developed by Yamaha Electronics Corp. that lets you experience movies at home with all the original dramatic sound impact. HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced, or high-definition video (including 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDCP ◆ Simple and easy connections with HDMI supported external components ◆ Functional link with an HDMI control-compatible TV Versatile Remote Control The supplied remote control comes with preset remote control codes used to control the DVD player, VCR, cable TV tuner, and digital satellite tuner connected to this unit. In addition, the remote control is equipped with the macro capability that enables a series of operations with the press of a single button. ◆ Dolby Digital This is the standard audio signal format used on various digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more realistic effect. ◆ DTS This is the standard audio signal format used on various digital media such as DVD, Blu-ray, and HD DVD. This surround technology delivers high-quality digital audio for up to 5.1 discrete channels to produce a directional and more realistic effect. ◆ Dolby Pro Logic This sophisticated, matrix decoding technology up-converts any 2-channel source audio to a 5.1-channel full bandwidth playback, resulting in a surround sound experience. ◆ Dolby Pro Logic II This is a redesigned version of Dolby Pro Logic that employs 2 stereo surround channels, a subwoofer, and a greatly enhanced steering logic. This improved technology provides an exceptionally stable sound field that simulates 5.1 to a much greater degree than the original Dolby Pro Logic. ◆ DTS Neo:6 This technology decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-channel playback, enabling playback with the full-range channels with higher separation. Music mode and Cinema mode are available to play back music and movie sources respectively. ◆ Music Enhancer to restore the original depth and width of compression artifacts such as the MP3 format. ◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A and Canada models only) Sophisticated FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Radio Data System capability (Europe model only) XM™ Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the XM MiniTuner Dock, and Antenna sold separately by XM Satellite Radio) ◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the XM HD content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience ◆ XM Satellite Radio information displaying capability iPod™ Controlling Capability (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini ◆ Playback information displaying capability ◆ Battery charging capability 3 En English AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit employs the automatic sound beam and acoustic optimization technology with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam microphone. You can avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieve highly accurate sound beam adjustments that best match your listening environment. Compatibility with the Newest Technologies This unit employs decoders compatible with Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, DTS Neo:6, Music Enhancer, and Neural Surround. INTRODUCTION Digital Sound Projector™ The Digital Sound Projector technology allows one slim unit to control and steer multiple channels of sound to generate multi-channel surround sound, thus eliminates the need for satellite loudspeakers and cabling normally associated with conventional surround sound systems. This unit also employs the beam modes that let you enjoy the surround sound (5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, and My Surround), 2-channel and 5-channel stereo playback, and My Beam. Features The “ ” logo and “IntelliBeam” are trademarks of YAMAHA Corporation. Manufactured under license from 1 Ltd. Worldwide patents applied for. The “ The “ ” logo and “Cinema DSP” are registered trademarks of YAMAHA Corporation. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ” logo and “Digital Sound Projector™” are trademarks of 1 Ltd. TruBass, SRS and the “ ” symbol are registered trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. TruBass technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. ™ “DTS” and “Neo:6” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. 4 En is a trademark of DiMAGIC Co., Ltd. Using this manual Using this manual 1 Install this unit in your listening room. See “Installation” on page 16. 2 Connect this unit to your TV and other external components. See “Connections” on page 19. 3 Prepare the remote control and turn on the power of this unit. See “Getting started” on page 30. 4 Run AUTO SETUP. See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 35. 5 Play back a source. See “Playback” on page 45. 6 Change the beam modes and/or CINEMA DSP settings. See “Enjoying surround sound” on page 54. INTRODUCTION Notes • This manual describes how to connect and operate this unit. For details regarding the operation of external components, refer to the supplied owner’s manual for each component. • Operations in this manual use keys on the supplied remote control of this unit unless otherwise specified. • y indicates a tip for your operation. • This manual is printed prior to production. Designs and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority. If you want to make additional settings and adjustments English 7 Run MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune settings and/or set remote control codes. See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72 and “Remote control features” on page 96. 5 En Supplied accessories Supplied accessories Check that you have received all of the following parts. Remote control (×1) STANDBY/ON Fasteners (×4) Optical cable (×1) POWER POWER AV TV DOCK DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 ENHANCER Digital audio pin cable (×1) 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY ENTER YSP DISPLAY (Orange) MENU TV/AV CAT/ A-E Cable clamp (×1) 3BEAM IntelliBeam microphone (×1) RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST Audio pin cable (×1) TV VOL TV MUTE CODE SET Cardboard microphone stand (×1) (White/Red) REFERENCE GUIDE (iPod/XM Radio) (×1) (U.S.A. and Canada models) UA YSP-3000 Digital Sound ProjectorTM Reference Guide for iPod/XM Radio Overview Batteries (×2) (AA, R6, UM-3) This is the Reference Guide for Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector. This guide explains the connections and operations of iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). Operations in this guide use keys on the supplied remote control unless otherwise specified. For general information including the controls and functions of this unit, refer to the owner’s manual. y The illustrations used in this Reference Guide are for U.S.A. and Canada models only. Indoor FM antenna (×1) iPodTM “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. Contents Using iPod™........................................................................................................................................ 2 Connection................................................................................................................................................. 2 Controlling iPod™ ....................................................................................................................................2 XM Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only)........................................................ 5 Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ................................................................................................. 5 Activating XM Satellite Radio .................................................................................................................. 6 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations ........................................................................................................ 6 Presetting the XM Satellite Radio channels .............................................................................................. 9 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...................................................................................... 10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 11 (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Demonstration DVD (×1) QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE OSD* video pin cable (×1) Items used for connections and operations in this guide 2 Connecting external components to this unit s Audio pin cable (x1) s OSD* video pin cable (x1) s Optical cable (x1) YSP-3000 s Digital audio pin cable (x1) s IntelliBeam microphone (x1) Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit. Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC wall outlet. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 19 to 29 in the Owner’s Manual. s Cardboard microphone stand (x1) s Demonstration DVD (x1) QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE *OSD: On-Screen Display This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to Connection example 1 1 Installing this unit This connection example shows a way to make the most of the capability of this unit. You can enjoy DVD audio and video with higher quality via the HDMI cable. In case your TV does not have a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner, connect a digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner via the HDMI cable. For details, see “Connections using HDMI cables” on page 21 in the Owner’s manual. TV DVD player TV Decide where to install this unit. DVD player Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. VIDEO INPUT Pull out the cap before connecting OPTICAL AUDIO OUTPUT ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT L 1 R COAXIAL AUDIO OUTPUT 2. Check the direction HDMI INPUT HDMI OUTPUT HDMI connection 1 2 the optical cable, and then check the Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the adjacent walls. Digital satellite tuner/Cable TV tuner/ Digital airwave tuner Optical cable 1. Pull out the cap Video connection Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. Connection example 2 this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the analog/digital audio from the TV. Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video connection between your DVD player and TV. surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual. direction to insert the cable. AUX 1 1 2 (Sold separately) 3 (Sold separately) 2 DVD IN An object, such as furniture An object, such as furniture OUT (Yellow) Front left channel 40˚ to 50˚ Center channel 1 Front left channel 2 3 HDMI 4 Center channel AUDIO INPUT Front right channel Front right channel Surround left channel Surround left channel Surround right channel Surround right channel OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD YSP-3000 COAXIAL To the AC wall outlet Subwoofer AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 TV/STB OUT AUDIO INPUT DIGITAL INPUT VIDEO AUX 2 SUBWOOFER AUX 1 Do not plug the power Audio connection DVD Install this unit using a rack, etc. TV/STB TV/STB Do not plug the power the rack. 2 Place this unit upside 3 Install this unit in the down and connect this unit to rack. your TV and DVD player. Audio connection 4 Installation is completed. supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first. In case you install this unit on top of a rack, etc., use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit. For further information on installation, see page 16 in the Owner’s Manual. 1 Place this unit in front of To the AC wall outlet Subwoofer AUX 1 are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit. The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack. To prevent this unit or the floor from being scratched, we recommend putting a piece of cloth on the floor in step 2. YSP-3000 COAXIAL supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. * The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. They * The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. They Connect cables in the following order. are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit. Supplied Connect cables in the following order. 1 Audio pin cable (Outputs TV analog audio sounds from this unit) Supplied 2 OSD video pin cable (Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV) 1 OSD video pin cable (Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV) 3 Optical cable (Outputs TV digital audio sounds from this unit) Sold separately 2 HDMI cable (Displays the DVD digital video on the TV) 3 HDMI cable (Inputs DVD digital audio/video signals to this unit) 4 Digital audio pin cable (Outputs DVD digital audio sounds from this unit) *OSD: On-Screen Display y Hint y Hint y Hint • To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor. • You can also use the optional metal wall bracket (sold separately) to mount this unit on the wall. For details, refer to the instructions supplied with the metal wall bracket. Note Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is turned on. If you have connected external components, follow the steps on the backside to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. Continued on the back • If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible TV (except some models) via HDMI, you can use the remote control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output component, and adjust the volume level of this unit. • Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is turned on. If you have connected external components, follow the steps on the backside to start the Continued AUTO SETUP procedure. on the back Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack. Printed in Malaysia WK75520 [En] C2007 All rights reserved. * The number of provided languages varies depending on the sales area. 6 En Controls and functions Controls and functions INTRODUCTION Front panel 3 1 2 AUX 3 INTELLIBEAM MIC 4 5 INPUT 1 AUX 3 input jack Connect your portable audio player (see page 26). 2 INTELLIBEAM MIC jack Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone for AUTO SETUP (see page 36). 3 Remote control sensor Receives infrared signals from the remote control. 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 5 INPUT Press repeatedly to switch between input sources (see page 45). Outputs a test tone to experience the sound beam (see page 91). 7 6 VOLUME + STANDBY/ON 6 VOLUME +/– Controls the volume level of all audio channels (see page 47). 7 STANDBY/ON Turns on the power of this unit or sets it to the standby mode (see page 31). Notes • When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click sound followed by the 4 to 5-second interval before sound reproducing. • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control or to search for HDMI signals. English 7 En Controls and functions Front panel display 2 1 890A B C 3 D 4 E 5 6 7 F 1 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at the HDMI IN jack(s). A NIGHT indicator Lights up when one of the night listening enhancers is selected (see page 67). 2 TUNER indicators FM: Light up when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast. XM: MEMORY flashes during the XM preset operation (U.S.A. and Canada models only). B SLEEP indicator Lights up when the sleep timer is set (see page 68). 3 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field program is selected (see page 64). 4 PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. 5 Decoder indicators Light up when the corresponding decoder operates (see page 56). Note The neural decoder is available for the U.S.A. and Canada models only. C Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only) Show the current Radio Data System status. D XM indicator (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Lights up when XM is selected as the input source. E Multi-information display Shows information with alphanumeric characters when you adjust the parameters of this unit. F Input channel indicators Show information when you adjust the parameters of this unit. The channel component of the current digital input signal is displayed (see page 56). 6 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Music Enhancer is selected (see page 66). 7 Volume level indicator Displays the current volume level. 8 DOCK indicator (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Lights up when your iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, or iPod mini is connected to this unit via the DOCK terminal on this unit. 9 SRS TruBass indicator Lights up when TruBass is turned on (see page 79). 0 EQUAL indicator Lights up when the TV volume equal mode is selected (see page 67). 8 En y You can adjust the brightness and display setting of the front panel display using the F.DISPLAY SET parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 83). Controls and functions Rear panel The illustration below shows the rear panel of the U.S.A. and Canada models. INTRODUCTION F ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD AUX 1 C DVD D COAXIAL OPTICAL DOCK AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 IN TV/STB XM IR IN OUT E HDMI 1 2 3 4 5 6 78 90 A B (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 ANTENNA jack Connect the FM antenna (see page 29). 2 DOCK terminal (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS10, sold separately) (see page 2 in the Reference Guide). 3 AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks Connect an external component via an analog connection (see page 23). 4 TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner via an analog connection (see pages 22 and 24). 5 VIDEO OUT jack Connect to the video input jack of your TV to display the OSD of this unit (see page 22). 6 SUBWOOFER OUT jack Connect your subwoofer (see page 28). 7 AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Connect an external component via a coaxial digital connection (see page 27). A XM antenna jack (U.S.A and Canada models only) Connect your XM Mini-Tuner Dock (sold separately) (see page 5 in the Reference Guide). B IR IN terminal (U.S.A and Canada models only) This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only (see page 29). C AUX 1 HDMI IN jack Connect your digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital air wave tuner, or game console via an HDMI connection (see page 21). D DVD HDMI IN jack Connect your DVD player via an HDMI connection (see page 21). E HDMI OUT jack Connect to the HDMI IN jack on your HDMI component such as a TV or a projector connected to this unit (see page 21). F AC power supply cable Connect to the AC wall outlet (see page 29). English 8 AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Connect an external component via an optical digital connection (see page 27). 0 DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Connect your DVD player via a coaxial digital connection (see page 23). 9 TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack Connect your TV, digital satellite tuner, or cable TV tuner via an optical digital connection (see pages 22 and 24). 9 En Controls and functions Remote control (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models) This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP and TV/AV operation modes (S). y You can also control other components using the remote control once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See “Controlling other components” on page 97 for details. 1 G STANDBY/ON POWER POWER *2 3 DVD AUX1 AV TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO *4 TV STB PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E MEMORY FM 5 6 AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 7 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 8 9 3BEAM 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP 0 DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH D E F Q R S t TV VOL U* *A *B *C H* I* J* K L M N O P MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET V* W* 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 STANDBY/ON Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 31). 3 Transmission indicator Lights up when infrared control signals are being output. 4 Input selector buttons Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3, STB, TV, or FM). 5 VOL MODE Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 67). 6 AUTO SETUP Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 35). 7 CINEMA DSP program buttons Select the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 63). 8 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 66). 9 Cursor buttons / / / Select and adjust SET MENU items. , ENTER 0 DISPLAY Displays information on the selected input signal. A VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see page 47). B MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 47). C TV INPUT Toggles between the input sources on the TV (see page 97). D CH LEVEL Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 85). E TEST Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each channel (see page 84). 10 En Controls and functions F DVD player/VCR control buttons Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 98 and 99). U TV VOL +/– Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 97). H TV POWER Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby mode (see page 97). V CH +/– Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 97 and 99). I AV POWER Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to the standby mode (see pages 98 and 99). W TV MUTE, CODE SET Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 97). Sets up remote control codes (see page 96). J INPUT1 Switches the input source on your TV (see page 97). Note K MACRO Use to set the TV macro (see page 100). INTRODUCTION G My Beam microphone Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My Beam auto-adjust function (see page 61). T RETURN Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET MENU screen. The functions L and M are available only when the FM stations are preset. L a/5 Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast (see page 52). M A-E Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast (see page 52). N SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 68). O INPUTMODE Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and ANALOG) (see page 87). P Beam mode buttons Change the beam mode settings (see pages 54, 60, and 61). Q SUR. DECODE Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 57). R MENU Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see pages 37 and 73). S Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. English 11 En Controls and functions This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control FM, Radio Data System, or iPod when the TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector (7). Note that the Radio Data System controls are available for Europe model only, and the iPod controls are available for Australia model only. STANDBY/ON DVD AUX1 STB TV TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E 1 2 MEMORY FM AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 0 ENTRY A-E ENTER 6 These functions are also available when this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 52) or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide). 3BEAM 4 DISPLAY Radio Data System and iPod: Displays information when this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 52) or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide). 9 MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN 4 VOLUME y +10 ENHANCER 3 5 SUR. DECODE OFF CH 2 Numeric buttons FM: Enter numbers. 3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 49 to 52). Use A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group (A to E) (see pages 51 and 52). Use ENTER to confirm the input above. POWER POWER AV 1 PRESET/TUNE FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the frequency search mode (see pages 49 to 52). 7 5 MEMORY FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 50 and 51). y This function is also available when this unit is receiving the Radio Data System (see page 52). TV VOL 6 SEARCH FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see page 49). 12 En MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET 7 Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. Controls and functions Remote control (U.S.A. and Canada models) y You can also control other components using the remote control once you set the appropriate remote control codes. See “Controlling other components” on page 97 for details. 1 G STANDBY/ON POWER POWER *2 3 AV DOCK AUX1 DVD *4 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT 0 MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 3BEAM 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 OFF 0 9 AUX3 TV STB 7 8 AUX2 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM 5 6 TV SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH E F Q R S t TV VOL U* *A *B *C D H* I* J* K L M N O P MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET V* W* 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 STANDBY/ON Sets this system to the standby mode (see page 31). 3 Transmission indicator Lights up when infrared control signals are being output. INTRODUCTION This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control this unit. Some buttons marked with an asterisk (*) share the common functions between the YSP and TV/AV operation modes (S). 4 Input selector buttons Use to select an input source (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, AUX3/DOCK, STB, TV, or FM/XM). 5 VOL MODE Turns on or off the volume modes (see page 67). 6 AUTO SETUP Enters the AUTO SETUP menu (see page 35). 7 Sound field program buttons Select the sound field programs (see page 63). 8 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Music Enhancer (see page 66). 9 Cursor buttons / / / Select and adjust SET MENU items. , ENTER 0 DISPLAY Displays information on the selected input signal. A VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of this unit (see page 47). B MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 47). C TV INPUT Toggles between the input source on your TV (see page 97). D CH LEVEL Adjusts the volume level of each channel (see page 85). E TEST Outputs a test tone when adjusting the output level of each channel (see page 84). English 13 En Controls and functions F DVD player/VCR control buttons Control your DVD player or VCR (see pages 98 and 99). G My Beam microphone Collects the test tones from this unit when using the My Beam auto-adjust function (see page 61). T RETURN Selects sleep timer settings or returns to the previous SET MENU screen. U TV VOL +/– Adjusts the volume level of your TV (see page 97). H TV POWER Turns on the power of your TV or sets it to the standby mode (see page 97). V CH +/– Changes the channels of your TV, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or VCR (see pages 97 and 99). I AV POWER Turns on the power of the selected component or sets it to the standby mode (see pages 98 and 99). W TV MUTE, CODE SET Mutes the audio output of your TV (see page 97). Sets up remote control codes (see page 96). J INPUT1 Switches the input source on your TV (see page 97). Note K MACRO Use to set the TV macro (see page 100). L a/5 Switches the preset station number (1 to 8) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see page 52). M CAT Switches the preset station group (A to E) when this unit is receiving an FM broadcast or XM channel (see page 52). N SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 68). O INPUTMODE Toggles between input modes (AUTO, DTS, and ANALOG) (see page 87). P Beam mode buttons Change the beam mode settings (see pages 54, 60, and 61). Q SUR. DECODE Selects the surround mode for playback (see page 57). R MENU Displays the setup menu on your TV monitor (see pages 37 and 73). S Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. 14 En The functions L and M are available only when the FM/XM stations are preset. Controls and functions STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM 1 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 2 4 5 6 MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 CAT/ A-E 6 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY ENTER TV/AV RETURN 4 VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TEST TV VOL TV MUTE CODE SET 2 Numeric buttons FM, XM: Enter numbers. 3 Cursor buttons / / / , ENTER FM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to change the preset station number (1 to 8) or frequency level (see pages 49 to 52). Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to change the preset station group (A to E) (see pages 51 and 52). Use ENTER to confirm the input above. XM: Use ENTRY ( / ) to select XM channels in All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to select the preset channel number (1 to 8) in Preset Search mode. Use CAT/A-E ( / ) to select XM categories in All Channel Search mode/Category Search mode, and to select the preset channel group (A to E) in Preset Search mode. Use ENTER to confirm the input above (see pages 7 and 8 in the Reference Guide). y MENU YSP DISPLAY CH LEVEL 5 3BEAM MUSIC ENHANCER 3 MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 1 PRESET/TUNE FM: Switches between the preset search mode and the frequency search mode (see pages 49 to 52). INTRODUCTION This section describes the functions of the remote control used to control FM, XM Satellite Radio, or iPod when the TV/AV mode is selected with the operation mode selector (7). 7 These functions are also available when this unit is playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide). 4 DISPLAY XM and iPod: Displays information when this unit is receiving an XM channel (see page 10 in the Reference Guide) or playing back your iPod (see page 3 in the Reference Guide). 5 MEMORY FM: Stores the preset stations (see pages 50 and 51). XM: Use to store the preset stations (see page 9 in the Reference Guide). 6 SEARCH FM: Switches between automatic and manual tuning (see page 49). XM: Switches between search modes (All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search) (see pages 7 and 8 in the Reference Guide). 7 Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. Select YSP when operating this unit and select TV/AV when operating your TV or other AV components. English 15 En Installation Installation This section describes a suitable installation location to install this unit using a metal wall bracket, a rack or a stand. Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components can be done before installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components, including this unit, in order to decide which procedure should come first. Especially when you make a connection over HDMI, we recommend that you make a connection first before installation (see page 21). Before installing this unit This unit creates surround sound by reflecting projected sound beams off the walls of your listening room. The surround sound effects produced by this unit may not be sufficient when this unit is installed in the following locations. • Rooms with walls inadequate for reflecting sound beams • Rooms with acoustically absorbent walls • Rooms with measurements outside the following range: W (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) x H (2 to 3.5 m (7 to 11.5 ft)) x D (3 to 7 m (10 to 23 ft)) • Rooms with less than 1.8 m (6 ft) from the listening position to this unit • Rooms where objects such as furniture are likely to obstruct the path of sound beams • Rooms where the listening position is close to the walls • Rooms where the listening position is not in front of this unit y • You can enjoy surround sound by selecting My Surround (see page 55) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not fulfill the above conditions (except when the listening position is not directly facing toward the front of this unit). • You can also enjoy surround sound by selecting 2-channel or 5channel stereo playback (see page 60) or My Beam (see page 61) as the beam mode even if your listening room may not fulfill the above conditions. Notes • We do not recommend putting this unit directly on the floor of your listening room. Please install this unit using a metal wall bracket, a rack, or a stand. • This unit weighs 11.5 kg (25 lbs 6 oz). Be sure to install this unit where it will not fall subject to vibrations, such as from an earthquake, and where it is out of the reach of children. • When using a cathode-ray tube (CRT) TV, do not install this unit directly above your TV. • This unit is shielded against magnetic rays. However, if the picture on your TV screen becomes blurred or distorted, we recommend moving this unit away from your TV. Installing this unit Install this unit where there are no obstacles such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. Parallel installation Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. Make sure you leave an adequate amount of ventilation space so that heat can escape. Make at least 5 cm (2 in) of space above or below this unit. An object, such as furniture Side view 5 cm (2 in) or more Corner installation Install this unit in the corner at a 40º to 50º angle from the adjacent walls. 40° to 50° Front Rear An object, such as furniture 16 En Installation ■ Installation examples Example 1 Install this unit as close to the exact center of the wall as possible. PREPARATION Example 2 Install this unit so that the sound beams can be reflected off the walls. Example 3 Install this unit as close to the exact front of your normal listening position as possible. English 17 En Installation ■ Using a metal wall bracket ■ Using a rack You can use the optional metal wall bracket to mount this unit on the wall in your listening room. You can install this unit either above or under your TV in a commercially available rack. Metal wall bracket When this unit is installed above your TV This unit TV YSP-3000 325 65 325 92 112 24- 7x22 65 When this unit is installed under your TV 4- 7 670 SPM-K30 (Option) (mm) y Refer to the instructions supplied with the metal bracket for details on how to attach the metal bracket to the wall or how to attach this unit to the metal bracket. ■ Using a stand You can mount your TV on a stand placed on a commercially available rack and install this unit under your TV. Note Make sure that the rack is large enough to allow adequate ventilation space around this unit (see page 16) and that it is strong enough to support the weight of both this unit and your TV. ■ Affixing this unit Peel off the film from each of the four supplied fasteners and then secure them to the bottom four corners of this unit and the top of the rack, etc. This unit Stand TV Peel off 2 the film 1 Fasteners Notes This unit y Refer to the instructions supplied with the stand for details on how to install the stand or how to mount and the TV on the stand. 18 En • Do not install this unit on top of a slanted surface. This unit may fall over and cause injury. • Make sure you wipe the surface of the rack, etc. before securing the fasteners. Applying the tape to a dirty or wet surface will weaken the sticking power of the tape, and this unit may fall as a result. Connections Connections This unit is equipped with the following types of audio/video input/output jacks/terminal: For audio input • 2 optical digital input jacks • 2 coaxial digital input jacks • 2 sets of analog input jacks • 1 universal dock terminal (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) For audio output • 1 subwoofer output jack For audio/video output • 1 HDMI output jack For video output • 1 analog output jack Use these jacks/terminal to connect external components such as your TV, DVD player, VCR, digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital air wave tuner, portable audio player, game console, and iPod. Further, by connecting a subwoofer to this unit, you can enjoy reinforced low-bass sounds. For details on how to connect various types of external components to this unit, see pages 21 to 28. PREPARATION For audio/video input • 2 HDMI input jacks CAUTION • Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. • Unplug the AC power supply cable before changing connections, moving or cleaning this unit. Audio connection Video connection TV This unit Subwoofer portable audio player Digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner VCR or game console 19 En English DVD player Connections Before connecting components ■ Cables used for connections ■ Affixing cables To prevent cables from becoming unplugged, place the supplied cable clamp with the open side facing upward, attach it to the rear panel of this unit in a suitable position, and then affix cables in the cable clamp. Audio/Video A HDMI cable Optical cable Attach to this unit Audio Audio pin cable (supplied) (White) ■ Information on HDMI™ (White) Audio Signals (Red) (Red) Input source Audio signal type DVD video Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM DVD audio 2-channel stereo (up to 96 kHz/24 bit) Blu-ray Disc HD DVD Dolby Digital, DTS, PCM Optical cable (supplied) Digital audio pin cable (supplied) (Orange) (Orange) Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. 3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable y 5 • We recommend that you use an HDMI cable shorter than 5 m (16 ft) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. Subwoofer pin cable ■ Priority order for audio input signals Video OSD video pin cable (supplied) (Yellow) (Yellow) When multiple types of audio signals are simultaneously being input from a single source component, this unit plays back the audio signals in the following priority order: HDMI → Digital → Analog As default settings, the following input jacks are assigned to the corresponding input sources: Input jack ■ Notes on connecting the optical cable • Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable. When you are not using the optical cable, be sure to put the cap back in place. • When inserting the cable into the optical digital jack, make sure the direction is correct. Input source TV/STB DVD AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 Cap 20 En HDMI Digital Analog Connections Connections using HDMI cables This unit is equipped with 2 HDMI input jacks and 1 HDMI output jack. If your TV and other components have HDMI jacks, use HDMI cables for simpler and easier connections, and you can skip the connection procedures from page 22 to 25. If your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner and an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack on your TV to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. Notes y We recommend that you secure the HDMI cable(s) with adhesive tape, etc. once you have connected the HDMI cable(s) to the HDMI jack(s) of this unit. Rear panel of this unit OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD PREPARATION • Even if you connect your TV and this unit via the HDMI jack, you need to connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit in order to display the OSD of this unit. • When HDMI CONTROL is set to OFF (see page 82) and this unit is in the standby mode, the signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the HDMI OUT jack. AUX 1 COAXIAL DVD OPTICAL SUBWOOFER AUX 1 IN TV/STB * OUT HDMI A Video input Optical digital output HDMI input This connection (except for a game console) is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. A A HDMI output DVD player/recorder HDMI output Digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, digital airwave tuner, or game console TV Audio/Video A HDMI cable Video OSD video pin cable Audio English Optical cable 21 En Connections Connecting a TV For audio connection, connect the analog audio output jacks on your TV to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit. If your TV has an optical digital output jack, connect the optical digital output jack on your TV to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. For video connection, connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD for easy viewing when you adjust the system parameters in SET MENU. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20). Notes • If you make analog and optical digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks. • Even if you connect your TV and this unit via the HDMI jack, you need to connect the video input jack on your TV to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit in order to display the OSD of this unit. Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL DOCK AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER R AUX 1 TV/STB XM L Analog audio output Video input Optical digital output TV Video OSD video pin cable Audio Audio pin cable Optical cable 22 En IR IN Connections Connecting a DVD player/recorder Connect the coaxial digital output jack on your DVD player/recorder to the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. When you connect this unit to your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder, connect the analog audio output jacks on your DVD/VCR combo player/recorder to the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit in addition to the coaxial digital audio connection. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20). Notes Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO PREPARATION • Check that your DVD player/recorder is properly set to output Dolby Digital and DTS digital audio signals. If not, adjust the system settings of your DVD player/recorder. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your DVD player/recorder. • If your DVD player/recorder does not have a coaxial digital output jack, make an optical digital audio connection instead (see page 27). DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER DOCK * R AUX 1 TV/STB XM IR IN For the DVD/VCR combo player/recorder connection L Analog audio output Video signal to the TV Coaxial digital output DVD player/recorder Audio Audio pin cable Digital audio pin cable English 23 En Connections Connecting a digital satellite tuner or a cable TV tuner Connect the optical digital output jack on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. Connect the analog audio output jacks on your digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner to the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20). Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL DOCK AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER R L Analog audio output Video signal to the TV * This connection (except for a game console) is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. Audio Audio pin cable Optical cable 24 En AUX 1 Optical digital output Digital satellite tuner or cable TV tuner TV/STB XM IR IN Connections Connecting a digital airwave tuner Connect the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit to the analog audio output jacks on your TV. Connect the optical digital output jack on your digital airwave tuner to the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit in addition to the analog audio connection. By doing so, you can enjoy both analog and digital broadcasts. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20). Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO PREPARATION ANTENNA DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER DOCK Connect to the analog audio output jacks on the TV. Video signal to the TV * AUX 1 TV/STB XM IR IN Optical digital output Digital airwave tuner This connection (except for a game console) is not necessary if your TV has a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner. Audio Audio pin cable Optical cable English 25 En Connections Connecting a portable audio player Connect the analog audio output jack on your portable audio player to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel of this unit. Front panel of this unit AUX 3 Analog audio output Portable audio player Audio 3.5 mm stereo mini plug cable 26 En Connections Connecting other external components If your component supports optical digital connections, connect the optical digital output jack on your component (e.g., DVD player/recorder) to the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. If your component does not support optical digital connections, connect the coaxial digital output jack on your component to the AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack on this unit. If your component does not support any digital connections, connect the analog audio output jacks on your component (e.g., VCR) to the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit. y To prevent the optical cable from being unplugged, affix the optical cable in the supplied cable clamp (see page 20). If you make analog and digital audio connections at the same time as shown in the illustration below, the digital audio signals input at the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT or AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack take priority over the analog audio signals input at the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks. Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO PREPARATION Note DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER DOCK R AUX 1 TV/STB XM IR IN L Analog audio output Video signal to the TV Optical digital output Coaxial digital output DVD player/recorder, VCR, game console, CD player, etc. Audio English Audio pin cable Optical cable Digital audio pin cable 27 En Connections Connecting a subwoofer Connect the monaural input jack on your subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER OUT jack on this unit. This connection alone does not output sound from the connected subwoofer. To output sound from the connected subwoofer, turn on the power of your subwoofer and then run AUTO SETUP (see page 35) or select SWFR for BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET (see page 78). Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL DOCK AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 5 Monaural input Subwoofer Audio 5 Subwoofer pin cable 28 En TV/STB XM IR IN Connections Connecting the FM antenna Connect the supplied FM antenna to the FM ANTENNA jack on this unit. FM indoor antenna (supplied) Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD PREPARATION COAXIAL OPTICAL DOCK AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 TV/STB XM IR IN About the IR IN terminal (U.S.A. and Canada models only) The IR IN terminal does not support normal external component connection. This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use only. DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL AUX 1 TV/STB Rear panel of this unit (U.S.A. and Canada models) XM IR IN IR IN terminal Connecting the AC power supply cable Once all other connections are complete, plug the AC power supply cable into the AC wall outlet. To the AC wall outlet English 29 En GETTING STARTED Getting started Installing batteries in the remote control y Remove the transparent sheet before using the remote control. Press Operation range of the remote control 1 Press and hold the mark on the battery cover and then open the cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) into the battery compartment. Make sure you insert the batteries according to the polarity markings (+/–). 3 The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft) of this unit and point it toward the remote control sensor of this unit during operation. Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 45 Close the battery cover. 45 Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: the operation range of the remote control decreases or the transmission indicator does not light up or becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • Exhausted batteries may leak. If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste. Dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • The memory stored in the remote control may be erased in the following cases: – The remote control is left without batteries for more than two minutes. – Exhausted batteries remain in the remote control. – The buttons on the remote control are accidentally pressed when you change batteries. • If the memory stored in the remote control is unwantedly erased, insert new batteries and set the remote control codes again. 30 En Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following places: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or a stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places • Do not expose the remote control sensor of this unit to direct sunlight or lighting such as inverted fluorescent lamps. • If the batteries grow old, the effective operation range of the remote control decreases considerably. If this happens, replace the batteries with two new ones as soon as possible. Getting started Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode 2 Press STANDBY/ON again to set this unit to the standby mode. Note When this unit is in the standby mode, only STANDBY/ON on the front panel or on the remote control is operational, and the other control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control are not operational until the power of this unit is turned on. INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK DVD AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 STB FM/XM SETUP TV INPUT1 MACRO TV PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. The volume level appears in the front panel display, and the current input source and beam mode are displayed. STANDBY/ON or STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control VOLUME 30 Current volume level MY SUR Current input source Current beam mode English DVD 31 En USING SET MENU Using SET MENU Displaying the OSD (on-screen display) This section describes how to display the OSD (on-screen display) of this unit on your TV screen and to set the parameters for your listening room. Once this is complete, you can enjoy real surround sound while watching TV in the comfort of your own home. 1 Check that the video input jack on your TV is connected to the VIDEO OUT jack on this unit to display the OSD of this unit. 2 Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. 3 Turn on the power of your TV. The following screen appears on your TV. YSP-3000 STANDBY/ON or Push [MENU] to begin set-up STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control OSD screen example If the OSD does not appear, use the remote control supplied with your TV to switch the video input until the OSD appears. 32 En Using SET MENU The flow chart of SET MENU The following diagram illustrates the overall flow of the setup procedure. Run LANGUAGE SETUP. See “Changing OSD language” on page 34. Run AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam). See “AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam)” on page 35. If an error occurs SETUP Look for a remedy. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for a complete list of error messages and possible remedies. Play back audio signals or adjust the settings for the beam mode and the CINEMA DSP. See “Playback” on page 45, “Enjoying surround sound” on page 54, and “Using sound field programs” on page 63. If you want to make additional settings and adjustments Run MANUAL SETUP. See “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72. y • If you cannot clearly hear a sound beam from a specific channel, adjust settings for SETTING PARAMETERS (see page 74) or for BEAM ADJUSTMENT (see page 75) in BEAM MENU. • If there are acoustically absorbent objects such as curtains in the path of the sound beams, adjust settings for TREBLE GAIN in BEAM MENU (see page 77). English 33 En CHANGING OSD LANGUAGE Changing OSD language This feature allows you to select the language of your choice that appears in SET MENU of this unit. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 4 Press / to select the desired language, and press ENTER. TV/AV YSP ENTER ENTER 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from SET MENU, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations while viewing information in the front panel display. 3 Press / to select LANGUAGE SETUP, and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER ;LANGUAGE SETUP . ENGLISH DEUTSCH Francais ESPANOL ITALIANO NEDERLANDS 34 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Choices: ENGLISH (English), DEUTSCH (German), Français (French), ESPAÑOL (Spanish), ITALIANO (Italian), NEDERLANDS (Dutch), Русский (Russian) AUTO SETUP (INTELLIBEAM) AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) This unit creates a sound field by reflecting sound beams on the walls of your listening room and by broadening the cohesion of all the channels. Just as you would arrange the speaker position of other audio systems, you need to set the beam angle to enjoy the best possible sound from this unit. This unit employs the beam optimization and sound optimization features with the aid of the supplied IntelliBeam microphone, allowing you to avoid troublesome listening-based setup and achieving highly accurate sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. We call these two features “IntelliBeam” generically. Beam optimization: This feature optimizes the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment. Sound optimization: This feature optimizes the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. The flow chart of AUTO SETUP This unit performs a series of checks to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality. You can choose to optimize all or part of the parameters. Notes *1 Optimizing the beam angle Beam optimization *1 The beam angle checking procedure is skipped if SOUND OPTIMZ only is selected. *2 The sound optimization procedure is skipped if BEAM OPTIMZ only is selected. *3 The subwoofer checking procedure is skipped if BEAM OPTIMZ only is selected. SETUP Checking the environment of your listening room *2 *3 Checking the subwoofer and optimizing the beam delay, frequency, and volume Sound optimization English 35 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Installing the IntelliBeam microphone The supplied IntelliBeam microphone collects and analyzes the sound that this unit produces in your actual listening environment. Follow the procedure below to connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit and make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is placed in a proper location and that there are no large obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room. Notes • After you have completed the AUTO SETUP procedure, be sure to disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. • The IntelliBeam microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. • Do not connect the IntelliBeam microphone to an extension cable as doing so may result in an inaccurate sound optimization. • An error may occur during the AUTO SETUP procedure if the IntelliBeam microphone is not properly placed in your listening room. To avoid the possibility of an error: – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone to the extreme right or left from the center of this unit. – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit. – Do not place the IntelliBeam microphone more than 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. • Make sure that there are no obstacles between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room as these objects obstruct the path of sound beams. However, any objects that are in contact with the walls will be regarded as a protruding part of the walls. • The best possible results are achieved if the IntelliBeam microphone is placed at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. However, if this is not possible, you can manually fine-tune the sound beam angle and balance the sound beam output levels using MANUAL SETUP (see page 72) once the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed. • If a subwoofer with adjustable volume and crossover/high-cut frequency controls is connected to CROSSOVER VOLUME HIGH CUT this unit, set the volume between 10 and 12 o’clock as viewed on a conventional clockface and set the crossover/high-cut frequency to the maximum. MIN MAX MIN MAX Subwoofer 1 Press STANDBY/ON to turn off the power of this unit. STANDBY/ON or STANDBY/ON Front panel 2 Remote control Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. 3 Place the IntelliBeam microphone on a flat level surface more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of the unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of the unit with the IntelliBeam microphone facing upward at your normal listening position. Note Be sure to place the IntelliBeam microphone on an imaginary center line drawn from this unit. y You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand to affix the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. IntelliBeam microphone INTELLIBEAM MIC Cardboard microphone stand 36 En Within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) Sofa AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Using AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Once the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit and properly placed in your listening room, follow the procedure below to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. You can also enter the AUTO SETUP procedure simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two seconds. In this case, this unit performs both of the beam optimization and sound optimization procedures. Center line IntelliBeam microphone ■ Assembling the supplied cardboard microphone stand You will find three separate parts (one circular part and two longitudinal parts) of the cardboard microphone stand originally put together. VOLUME + STANDBY/ON SETUP 1 INPUT 2 STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 3 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 0 Disassemble the three parts of the cardboard microphone stand originally put together. +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME 9 SUR. DECODE OFF 1 3BEAM RETURN CH TV VOL (U.S.A. and Canada models) Insert one of the longitudinal part into the crevice of the other longitudinal part. 3 Place the circular part on top of the two combined longitudinal parts. 4 Place the supplied IntelliBeam microphone on top of the circular part. English 2 37 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 3 Notes • Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible while this unit is performing the AUTO SETUP procedure. • To achieve the best results possible, evacuate yourself from your listening room until the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed so that you may not obstruct the path of sound beams. • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • The AUTO SETUP procedure may not be run successfully if this unit is installed in one of the rooms described in “Before installing this unit” on page 16. In such cases, run MANUAL SETUP (see page 72) to manually adjust the corresponding parameters. • If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played, the AUTO SETUP procedure stops, and an error message appears on the screen. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for appropriate remedies. SET MENU p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 1 . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU again. • You can start the BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ procedure simply by pressing and holding AUTO SETUP for more than two seconds. Steps 4 and 5 are skipped and then the screen shown in step 5 is displayed on your TV. Start the AUTO SETUP procedure from step 6. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. y • The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about three minutes maximum. A chime is played when the AUTO SETUP procedure is run successfully. • If there are curtains in your listening room, we recommend following the procedure below. 1. Open the curtains to improve sound reflection. 2. Run BEAM OPTIMZ only. 3. Close the curtains. 4. Run SOUND OPTIMZ only. • You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 42). A set of settings optimized according to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening environment (see page 43). Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. 4 Press / to select AUTO SETUP and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER Press STANDBY/ON to turn on the power of this unit. If a subwoofer is connected to this unit, turn on the power of the subwoofer. STANDBY/ON ;AUTO SETUP or STANDBY/ON Front panel Remote control . 1)BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ 2)BEAM OPTIMZ only 3)SOUND OPTIMZ only 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 38 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 5 Press / to select BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ, BEAM OPTIMZ only, or SOUND OPTIMZ only and then press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 6 Check the following points once again before starting the AUTO SETUP procedure. • Is the IntelliBeam microphone firmly connected to this unit? • Is the IntelliBeam microphone placed in a proper location? • Are there any large obstacles in between the IntelliBeam microphone and the walls in your listening room? 7 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure. The following screen appears on your TV and the AUTO SETUP procedure starts in 10 seconds. Leave the room quietly before starting the AUTO SETUP procedure. ENTER ENTER AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the YSP unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel ENTER BEAM OPTIMZ only (Beam optimization only) Use to optimize the beam angle so that the parameter best matches your listening environment. This menu takes about one minute. SETUP BEAM+SOUND OPTIMZ (Beam optimization and sound optimization) Use to optimize the beam angle, delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you make settings for the first time. • If the unit has been relocated. • If your listening room has been restructured. • If the objects in your listening room (furniture, etc.) have been rearranged. This menu takes about three minutes. AUTO SETUP START Will begin in 10sec Please leave the room ← Flashes **-------[RETURN]:Cancel If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and an error message is displayed. See “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 for a complete list of error messages and their proper remedies. Follow the instructions and perform the AUTO SETUP procedure again. SOUND OPTIMZ only (Sound optimization only) Use to optimize the beam delay, volume, and quality so that the parameters best match your listening environment. It is recommended that you should select this optimization feature in the following cases: • If you have opened or closed the curtains in your listening room before using this unit. • If you have manually set the beam angle. This menu takes about two minutes. Note English You must optimize the beam angle in the BEAM OPTIMZ only procedure before starting the SOUND OPTIMZ only procedure. 39 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) 8 Check that the following screen is displayed on your TV. The results of the AUTO SETUP procedure are displayed on your TV. 9 Press ENTER to confirm the results or press RETURN to cancel the results. The following screen is displayed for two seconds and then disappears from your TV. Example 1 SHOW RESULT MEASUREMENT COMPLETE AUTO SETUP COMPLETE ← Flashes ENTER Please remove the MIC from the YSP and the listening position. BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. Example 2 SHOW RESULT MEASUREMENT COMPLETE ← Flashes If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed in step 8, the following screen is displayed after pressing ENTER. In this case, see ERROR E-1 in “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41. Press ENTER to exit AUTO SETUP and then run the procedure again from step 3. ENVIRONMENT CHECK[FAILED] BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :YES AUTO SETUP COMPLETE [ENTER]:Save set-up. [RETURN]:Do not save set-up. Your YSP unit may not be set up correctly. We recommend you try again. Please press [ENTER] key to exit. y • If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK [FAILED]” is displayed, we recommend running the AUTO SETUP procedure again. For details, see step 9. • If “SUBWOOFER : NOT APPLICABLE” is displayed even though a subwoofer is connected to this unit, increase the volume level of the subwoofer and run the AUTO SETUP procedure again. • Depending on the environment of your listening room, the beam angle of front left and right, and surround left and right may be set to the same value even if “5 BEAM” is displayed as a result. 10 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone from the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. y If you want to save and load settings, see “Using the system memory” on page 42. 40 En AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) ■ Error messages for AUTO SETUP Before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts Error message ERROR E-2 No MIC detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. Cause The IntelliBeam microphone is not connected to this unit. Remedy Connect the IntelliBeam microphone to this unit. See page 36 While the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress If one of the errors listed below except E-1 is displayed, press RETURN. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing AUTO SETUP in step 3, run the procedure again from step 3 after the screen disappears. In case you have started the AUTO SETUP procedure by pressing MENU in step 3, run the procedure again from step 4 after the screen in step 3 is displayed. Run MANUAL SETUP if the problem is difficult to be saved. Error message Cause Remedy See page There is too much unwanted noise in your listening room. Make sure that your listening room is as quiet as possible. You may want to choose certain hours during the day when there is not much noise coming from outside. — ERROR E-2 No MIC detected. Please check MIC connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone was disconnected while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit. 36 ERROR E-3 Unexpected control is detected. Please re-try. Some other operations were performed on this unit while the AUTO SETUP procedure was in progress. Do not perform any other operations while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. — ERROR E-4 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set in front of YSP. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in front of this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed in front of this unit. 36 ERROR E-5 Please check MIC position. MIC should be set above 1.8m/6.0ft. The IntelliBeam microphone is not placed in the right distance from this unit. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is installed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit and within 1 m (3.3 ft) from the center height of this unit. 36 ERROR E-6 Volume level is lower than expected. Please check MIC position/connection and re-try. The IntelliBeam microphone cannot collect the sound produced by this unit because the sound output level is too low. Make sure that the IntelliBeam microphone is firmly connected to this unit and placed in a proper location. If the problem persists, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha service center for assistance. 36 ERROR E-7 Unexpected error happened. Please re-try. An internal system error occurred. Repeat the AUTO SETUP procedure. — SETUP ERROR E-1 Please test in quieter environment. English 41 En USING THE SYSTEM MEMORY Using the system memory Convenient usage of the system memory 3 You can save the current settings adjusted in SET MENU in the system memory of this unit. It is handy to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if there are curtains in the path of sound beams, the effectiveness of the sound beams will vary depending on whether the curtains are open or closed. Press / to select MEMORY and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER When the curtains are closed When the curtains are open ;MEMORY . 1)LOAD 2)SAVE p 4 Saving settings 1 p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press / to select SAVE and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV ENTER ENTER YSP 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 42 En [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter p y . MEMORY1 MEMORY2 MEMORY3 p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter 2)MEMORY SAVE Using the system memory 5 Press / to select MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. ENTER ENTER Loading settings You can recall the settings saved in “Saving settings” on page 42 according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2)MEMORY SAVE 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. MEMORY1 Save Now ? SET MENU Push [ENTER] to Save . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP MENU Press ENTER again. The new parameters are saved as MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3. Once the parameters are saved, the display returns to the SET MENU screen. SETUP 6 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 2)MEMORY SAVE MEMORY1 Saving ENTER 3 Press / to select MEMORY and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. SET MENU . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP ENTER ENTER 7 p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ;MEMORY Press MENU to exit. The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV. p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p MENU . 1)LOAD 2)SAVE English 43 En Using the system memory 4 Press / to select LOAD and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 6 Press ENTER again. The new parameters saved as MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 are loaded. Once the parameters are loaded, the display returns to the SET MENU screen. 1)MEMORY LOAD ENTER ENTER MEMORY1 Loading ENTER 1)MEMORY LOAD . MEMORY1 MEMORY2 MEMORY3 SET MENU p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Enter . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP Press / to select MEMORY1, MEMORY2, or MEMORY3 and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. 7 ENTER ENTER 1)MEMORY LOAD MEMORY1 Load Now ? Push [ENTER] to Load 44 En p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 5 Press MENU to exit. The SET MENU screen disappears from your TV. MENU PLAYBACK Playback Selecting the input source You can play back sound from the components connected to this unit simply by pressing INPUT on the front panel repeatedly or pressing one of the input selector buttons (TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, or AUX3) on the remote control. The name of the selected input source and the type of corresponding input mode appear in the front panel display. ■ Front panel operations Press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to toggle between TV, STB, DVD, AUX1, AUX2, and AUX3. The name of the corresponding input source and the type of current input mode are displayed in the front panel display. ■ Remote control operations y In addition to controlling this unit, you can also operate other AV components if you set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/ AV to change the control area (see page 96). Press TV to play back a TV program. TV INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 AUTO TV/STB TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY Name of the selected input source Type of the selected input mode AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 9 +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER DISPLAY STB SUR. DECODE OFF 0 Press STB to play back a satellite broadcast. BASIC OPERATION FM/XM MENU TV/AV YSP AUTO TV/STB RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Press DVD to play back a DVD. DVD DVD AUTO English 45 En Playback Press AUX1 (or AUX2) to play back a component connected to the AUX 1 (or AUX 2) jack on the rear panel of this unit. 2 Switch to the video input on your TV using the remote control supplied with the TV and display the DVD menu screen. AUX1 Note If necessary, turn down the volume of your TV until no sound is heard. AUX1 AUTO 3 DVD Press AUX3 to play back a component connected to the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel. AUX3 Press DVD to select DVD as the input source. 4 Play back DVD on your DVD player using the supplied remote control. Audio signals from your DVD player are output from this unit. y AUX3 Playing back sources Once an input source is selected (see page 45), you can play back the selected input source. Note This section uses a DVD player as an example of the playback source. y For details on your TV and DVD player, refer to the respective owner’s manual. 1 Turn on the power of your DVD player. 46 En • You can use the supplied demonstration DVD to check the digital signals being input at the DVD player with the digital connection (optical/coaxial/HDMI). The input channel and LFE indicators light up when this unit detects the 5.1-channel signal input at the optical/coaxial/HDMI jack. If the PCM indicator lights up, confirm the settings of the digital output, bitstream output, DTS output, and/or HDMI output of the DVD player. • If the output volume is too low, increase the volume of this unit to around 45. • If you have set the appropriate remote control codes for your TV and DVD player, you can use the remote control supplied with this unit to operate these components. For details on how to set remote control codes, see page 96. Playback ■ Muting the sound Adjusting the volume TV VOL VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE CODE SET 1 Press MUTE to mute the sound. “AUDIO MUTE ON” appears in the front panel display, and the volume level indicator flashes. MUTE INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE AUDIO MUTE ON Flashes Press VOLUME +/– to increase or decrease the volume level. The numeric value of the volume level appears in the front panel display. Control range: MIN (minimum), 01 to 99, MAX (maximum) DVD 2 or VOLUME Press MUTE again (or press VOLUME +/–) to resume the sound output. “AUDIO MUTE OFF” appears temporarily in the front panel display (or the numeric value of the current volume level appears if you press VOLUME +/–), and the volume level indicator lights up. + VOLUME BASIC OPERATION VOLUME 5BEAM MUTE or Front panel Remote control Lights up VOLUME 30 AUDIO MUTE OFF Notes • The volume level of all input sources (including multi-channel as well as stereo sources) changes at the same time. • One volume level increases or decreases each time you press VOLUME +/–. • You can continuously increase or decrease the volume level if you press and hold VOLUME +/–. Note The sound output of all input sources (including multi-channel as well as stereo sources) is muted at the same time. y You can select whether the sound output is to be muted completely or by 20 dB when you press MUTE (see page 78). English 47 En FM TUNING FM tuning There are two tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when the radio signal is strong and there is no interference. If the radio signal is weak, tune into the FM station manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations in total (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station numbers each). y • This section exceptionally uses the remote control for Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models. • When the operation mode selector is set to TV/AV, you can operate all FM functions. When the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can only operate the functions described in “Selecting a preset station” (see page 52). Note Orient the connected FM antenna for the best reception. FM controls and functions ■ Remote control functions Set the operation mode selector (8) to TV/AV before tuning or preset tuning. 1 FM Selects FM as the input source. This unit is tuned into the last selected FM station. y U.S.A. and Canada models use FM/XM. STANDBY/ON POWER POWER DVD AUX1 STB TV AV TV AUX2 AUX3 2 PRESET/TUNE Switches between the preset search mode and the frequency search mode (see page 51). TV INPUT1 MACRO 1 2 3 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E MEMORY FM AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 3BEAM 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 6 7 4 ENTRY ( / ) • Selects the preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 52). • Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display (see page 49). 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY A-E ENTER MENU 4 TV/AV 5 YSP DISPLAY 3 Numeric buttons Use numbers 1 through 8 to select the preset station numbers (see page 52). RETURN 8 5 A-E ( / ) Selects the preset station groups (A to E) (see page 51). y U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E VOLUME MUTE CH TV INPUT . TV VOL TV MUTE 6 MEMORY • Stores a preset station in the memory (see page 51). • Hold down this button for more than three seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 50). CODE SET (Europe, Australia, Asia, and Korea models) 7 SEARCH Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned off) (see page 49). 8 Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of this unit. 48 En FM tuning Automatic tuning 4 Automatic tuning is effective when the radio station signals are strong and there is no interference. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. Press ENTRY ( / ) once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into an FM station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the station appears in the front panel display. • Press to tune into a higher frequency. • Press to tune into a lower frequency. TV/AV ENTRY YSP 2 ENTER Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM Manual tuning y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). 3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the desired FM station signal is weak, tune into it manually. Note Manual tuning automatically switches the tuner to the monaural reception mode to increase the signal quality. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV YSP 2 Lights up Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION SEARCH FM A FM 88.9 MHz No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the colon (:) off. y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). English 49 En FM tuning 3 Press SEARCH repeatedly until the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. 2 Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM SEARCH y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). A FM 88.9 MHz 3 No colon (:) If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not available. Press PRESET/TUNE to turn the colon (:) off. 4 Press and hold MEMORY for more than three seconds. The preset station group and number, the MEMORY indicator, and the AUTO indicator flash. Automatic preset tuning starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies. Press ENTRY ( / ) to tune into the desired station manually. MEMORY ENTRY Flashes ENTER A1:FM 88.9 MHz y Hold down the button for quick search. Automatic preset tuning You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station numbers each). You can recall the preset stations easily by selecting the preset station groups and numbers. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV YSP 50 En Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. Notes • When you overwrite an existing preset station, the previously stored FM station is cleared. • If the number of automatically preset stations does not reach 40 (E8), this unit automatically stops searching. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are preset automatically. If the desired station is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 51. FM tuning y Manual preset tuning • If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to display the colon. • U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E . • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT for U.S.A. and Canada models). You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 5 preset station groups with 8 preset station numbers each) manually. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. 5 TV/AV YSP Press ENTRY ( / ) to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. ENTRY 2 3 Tune into the desired FM station. See page 49 for tuning instructions. ENTER Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. Flashes MEMORY A1:FM 88.9 MHz Preset station number y 4 Press A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. 6 Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display together with the station band and frequency. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. BASIC OPERATION • You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired preset station number. • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset number by pressing / . Flashes MEMORY A-E ENTER Flashes A1:FM 88.9 MHz The displayed station has been stored as A1. A :FM 88.9 MHz Notes • When you overwrite an existing preset station, the previously stored FM station is cleared. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 51 En English Preset Colon (:) station group FM tuning Selecting a preset station You can tune into the preset stations simply by selecting the preset station groups and numbers. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. 4 Press ENTRY ( / ) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display together with the station band and frequency. ENTRY TV/AV YSP 2 ENTER Press FM to select FM as the input source. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM A1:FM 88.9 MHz y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select FM as the input source. • If “XM” appears in the front panel display, press FM/XM again to display “FM” (U.S.A. and Canada models only). 3 Press A-E ( / ) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A-E ENTER y • You can also use the numeric buttons to select the desired preset station number. • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset number by pressing / . Displaying the Radio Data System information (Europe model only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations. You can display the four types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. Notes y • If the colon (:) does not appear, press PRESET/TUNE to display the colon. • U.S.A. and Canada models use CAT/A-E . • Even when the operation mode selector is set to YSP, you can select the desired preset group by pressing A-E (CAT for U.S.A. and Canada models). 52 En • You can select the Radio Data System display modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicators are lit in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System display modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, tune into the desired station manually (see page 49). • In case the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. FM tuning 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. We recommend automatic preset tuning to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (see page 50). Program type Descriptions NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sport EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Pop music ROCK M Rock music M.O.R.M Middle-of-the-road music LIGHT M Light classical CLASSICS Serious classical OTHER M Other music Note The AUTO PS feature of this unit changes the frequency display to the “PS” mode if the Radio Data System station broadcasts the PS data. 2 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. DISPLAY PS PTY RT CT Frequency display BASIC OPERATION • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program. • Select “PTY” to display the type of Radio Data System program. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program. • Select “CT” to display the current time. Note In the “RT” mode, this unit can scroll the display with a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). English 53 En ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying surround sound You can enjoy multi-channel surround sound by changing the beam mode using the beam mode buttons on the remote control. Select 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, 3 Beam, or My Surround for multi-channel playback. Notes • When ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER is set in MANUAL SETUP (see page 74), 5 Beam and 3 Beam cannot be selected. • To enjoy 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam as the beam mode, you must perform AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP so that the parameters best match your listening environment. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER 5 Beam 3BEAM Outputs sound beams from the front left, front right, center, surround left, and surround right channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying surround sound effects to the fullest when you watch DVDs recorded in a multi-channel format or play back 2-channel sources in a multi-channel format. MENU Press 5BEAM to select 5 Beam. TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN 5BEAM (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Notes TV/AV YSP 2 Press one of the beam mode buttons (5BEAM, ST+3BEAM, 3BEAM, or MY SUR.) to select the desired beam mode for 5.1channel play back. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 MY SUR. 6 54 En • To achieve the best surround sound effect, make sure that there are no obstacles placed in the path of sound beams in that the objects may prevent the sound beams from rebounding directly off the walls in your listening room. • The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls in your listening room. • “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (see page 74). Enjoying surround sound Stereo plus 3 Beam Outputs normal sound from the front left and right channels and sound beams from the center and surround left and right channels. This mode is ideal for watching live recordings on a DVD. Vocals and instrumental sounds can be heard close to the center of the listening position while sound reflections from the venue itself can be heard on your right and left, giving you the feeling that you are sitting right in front of the stage. Press ST+3BEAM to select Stereo plus 3 Beam. Notes • When you play back multi-channel sources, surround left and right signals are mixed down and output from the front left and right channels. • The front left and right sound beams are output toward the walls in your listening room. • “SP Pos. Corner!” appears in the front panel display if INSTALLED POSITION is set to ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (see page 74). My Surround ST+3BEAM 2 This mode enables surround system in a small listening area which may not fulfill the listening room conditions for other beam modes (see “Before installing this unit” on page 16). Use this beam mode when you want to enjoy surround sound near this unit, or when the other beam modes are unavailable. Press MY SUR. to select My Surround. MY SUR. 6 Note The front left and right sound beams are output directly toward the listening position. BASIC OPERATION 3 Beam Outputs sound beams from the front left and right and center channels. This mode is ideal for enjoying movies with the whole family. Because the listening position area is widened, you can enjoy excellent quality surround sound over a wider area. In addition, you can use this mode when the listening position is close to the backside of the wall, and the surround left and right sound beams cannot be reflected off the wall. Notes • Beam mode settings such as beam angles and distances are ineffective in this mode. • For the full effect of My Surround, your listening position must face toward the front of this unit. Press 3BEAM to select 3 Beam. 3BEAM 3 English y You can achieve a more realistic surround effect if you adjust settings for IMAGE LOCATION in BEAM MENU (see page 77). 55 En Enjoying surround sound ■ Decoder indicators Depending on the input source and the selected surround mode, the decoder indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: Status When PCM signals are being input Indicator PCM When DTS digital signals are being input When DTS Neo:6 is selected as the surround mode When Dolby Digital signals are being input When Dolby Pro Logic is selected as the surround mode When Dolby Pro Logic II is selected as the surround mode + DIGITAL PL PL • You can select an input mode (AUTO, DTS, or ANALOG) by pressing INPUTMODE repeatedly (see page 87). • Discs encoded in DTS-ES, Dolby Digital 5.1 EX, Dolby Digital EX, or Dolby Digital Surround EX will be played back in DTS or Dolby Digital. ■ Input channel indicators Depending on the channel component of the current digital input signal, the input channel indicators in the front panel display light up as follows: When 2-channel stereo signals are being input When 5.1-channel signals are being input 56 En Indicator Recommended source Surround mode Dolby Pro Logic – All sources Dolby Pro Logic II Movie Music Game Movies Music Games DTS Neo:6 Cinema Music Movies Music – XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Neural Surround (U.S.A. and Canada models only) y Status ■ Surround modes and recommended sources Notes • When you select an input source (see page 45), the surround mode used for the previously selected input source is automatically selected. • If the power of this unit is turned off and on again, the surround mode used for the previously selected input source before the power was turned off is automatically selected. • If the surround modes are not available, “Prohibit” appears in the front panel display when you press SUR. DECODE. • The surround modes are available: – when the beam mode is set to a setting other than the 2channel or 5-channel stereo playback (see page 60) and My Surround (see page 55). – when the CINEMA DSP programs are turned off (see page 65). – when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 64). In this case, only Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, and DTS Neo:6 Cinema are available. – when 2-channel signals are being input. – when the Music Enhancer is turned off (see page 66). Enjoying surround sound Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound This unit can decode 2-channel sources for 5.1-channel playback so that you can enjoy a variety of surround sound effects by switching the surround mode. 2 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to switch between surround modes. Choices: Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music, PRO LOGIC, PLII Movie, PLII Music, PLII Game, neural surround Default setting: Neo:6 Cinema y The surround modes are available only when the CINEMA DSP programs are turned off (see page 65) or when the movie program is selected as the CINEMA DSP program (see page 64). In addition, the beam mode must be set to 5 Beam, Stereo plus 3 Beam, or 3 Beam (see page 54), while the Music Enhancer must be also turned off (see page 66). 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. or SUR. DECODE ENTER 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF SUR. DECODE 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY MENU Neo:6 Cinema TV/AV CAT/ A-E ENTER YSP DISPLAY Neo:6 Music RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) PRO LOGIC BASIC OPERATION PLII Movie 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. PLII Music TV/AV YSP PLII Game neural surround (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Example of the surround mode display in the front panel display when the CINEMA DSP program and the Music Enhancer are turned off English 57 En Enjoying surround sound Enjoying TV in surround sound 4 If you hear sound from your TV speakers, reduce the volume level of your TV until you can no longer hear any audio being output. To reduce the TV volume level, use the remote control supplied with your TV. 5 Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume level. You can enjoy analog audio signals output from your TV in real surround sound. y Before performing the steps below, set the volume of this unit to 30. If necessary, adjust the volume level in step 4 below. TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY VOLUME AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH TV VOL 6 Press SUR. DECODE repeatedly (or press SUR. DECODE and then press / ) to switch between surround modes. Signals input from 2-channel sources are played back in multi-channels. For more information on surround modes, see page 56. SUR. DECODE (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Select the TV channel you want to watch. To select a TV channel, use the remote control supplied with your TV. or SUR. DECODE ENTER 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 3 Press TV. This unit outputs audio signals from your TV. TV 58 En Enjoying surround sound Adjusting surround mode parameters You can configure the parameters for Dolby Pro Logic II Music and DTS Neo:6 Music to fine-tune the surround sound effect. MUSIC MOVIE 7 8 OFF 0 SPORTS +10 ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 PANORAMA Gives the front left and right channel sound a wraparound effect, distributed throughout the entire surround sound field to give you an expansive feeling. Choices: ON/OFF Default setting: OFF 9 SUR. DECODE ENHANCER ■ When Dolby Pro Logic II Music is selected Repeat steps 1 and 2 in “Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround sound” on page 57 and select PL II Music or Neo:6 Music. DIMENSION Adjusts the difference in volume between the front and surround channels to the desired volume balance. Control range: –3 (toward the surround direction) to +3 (toward the front direction) Default setting: STD (standard) C. WIDTH Distributes the center channel sound to the left and right. If 0 is selected, the center channel sound is output only from the center channel. Control range: 0 to 7 Default setting: 3 ■ When DTS Neo:6 Music is selected 2 Press / to select the parameter. 3 BASIC OPERATION ENTER C. IMAGE Adjusts the center image from three channels (front left and right and center) to varying degrees. Control range: 0.0 (wider) to 1.0 (toward the center) Default setting: 0.3 Press / to configure the selected parameter. ENTER English 59 En ENJOYING STEREO SOUND Enjoying stereo sound You can enjoy 2-channel and 5-channel stereo playback as the beam modes by pressing STEREO on the remote control. Notes • When you play back Dolby Digital audio signals in the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback, the dynamic range becomes compressed. If the volume level decreases to the extreme, use other beam modes except My Beam. • When the 2-channel or 5-channel stereo playback is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 56) and the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 63) become ineffective. Note 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER When you play back multi-channel sources, all signals except those from the front left and right channels are mixed down and output from the front left and right channels. No audio is output from the center and surround channels. MENU TV/AV 5-channel stereo playback YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Sounds are output from front left and right, center, and surround left and right. This is ideal for playback in a large listening area or at a party. 2-channel stereo playback Sounds are output from the front right and left channels. This is ideal for playing back hi-fi sources, such as CDs, and can be used to replace your TV speakers. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV 2 Press STEREO twice to select the 5-channel stereo playback as the beam mode. “5CH STEREO” appears in the front panel display. YSP STEREO 4 2 Press STEREO to select the 2-channel stereo playback as the beam mode. “STEREO” appears in the front panel display. STEREO 4 STEREO 60 En 5CH STEREO PLAYING BACK SOUND CLEARLY (MY BEAM) Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) You can improve listenability in a noisy environment by changing the beam mode to My Beam, which outputs sound beams directly toward the listening position in a single channel. In addition, My Beam is also ideal when you do not want the sound beams to be reflected on the walls in your listening room or when you do not want to disturb other people while enjoying music or movies at night. My Beam microphone STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Note Using auto-adjust function The My Beam microphone on the remote control collects the test tones from this unit so that the beam angle can be automatically adjusted. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press and hold MY BEAM for more than two seconds. A test tone is output twice from this unit. Keep pointing the remote control toward this unit while the test tones are being output so that the My Beam microphone can collect the test tones. Control range: L60° to R60° Operation guarantee range: 6 m (20 ft), L45° to R45° Notes BASIC OPERATION If My Beam is selected as the beam mode, the surround modes (see page 56), the CINEMA DSP programs (see page 63), and TruBass (see page 79) become ineffective. In addition, no audio is output from the subwoofer connected to this unit. • If an error occurs, an error buzzer is played and “MY BEAM ERROR” is displayed in the front panel display. • An error may occur if the listening room is noisy. Make sure that the listening room is as quiet as possible while the test tones are being output. • Do not shake or move the remote control while the test tones are being output. • Do not cover the My Beam microphone on the remote control while the test tones are being output. • The batteries in the remote control may be weak if the remote control does not function properly. In this case, replace all the batteries and then try the procedure again. • When the input signal with 64 kHz or 96 kHz of sampling frequency is being played back, the beam angle cannot be automatically adjusted. English MY BEAM 5 61 En Playing back sound clearly (My Beam) Using manual-adjust function You can adjust the beam angle manually while playing back an input source. This function is also ideal if the listening position is out of the operation guarantee range of the auto-adjust function. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press MY BEAM. “MY BEAM” is displayed in the front panel display. MY BEAM 5 3 Press / while “MY BEAM” is displayed to adjust the beam angle. Control range: L90° to R90° • Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle on the left side. • Press repeatedly to increase the horizontal angle on the right side. ENTER ANGLE 62 En 0 USING SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Using sound field programs This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from stereo or multi-channel sources. This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha CINEMA DSP (digital sound field processing) chip containing several sound field programs used to enhance your playback experience. Most of the CINEMA DSP programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The Yamaha CINEMA DSP programs are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Note Choose a CINEMA DSP program based on your listening preference and do not purely rely on the name of the CINEMA DSP program itself. ■ What is a sound field? A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument is the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable the listener to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which the listener is sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, there are two distinct types of sound reflections combined with the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument to make up the sound field. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 80 ms after the direct sound) after reflecting from one surface only (from the ceiling or the wall, for example). Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections, and subsequent reverberations all together help us determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create the sound fields. BASIC OPERATION Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, the back of the room, etc.) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. With the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you can create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a listening room of virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the CINEMA DSP technology. English 63 En Using sound field programs CINEMA DSP programs You can select from three different CINEMA DSP programs (MUSIC, MOVIE, and SPORTS) depending on the type of source you want to enjoy. The CINEMA DSP indicator lights up in the front panel display when one of the CINEMA DSP programs is selected. ■ Movie program Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back movie sources, especially the ones encoded in Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Notes • The CINEMA DSP programs are ineffective when My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode. • If the CINEMA DSP programs are not available, “Prohibit” appears in the front panel display when you press one of the CINEMA DSP program buttons on the remote control. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF TV/AV YSP 2 3BEAM MOVIE 8 9 SUR. DECODE ■ Sports program +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back sports sources. This program densely concentrates the vocal sound of the commentator in the center while broadening the sound from the audience or the environment all around your listening room. 1 ■ Music program Select this CINEMA DSP program when you play back music sources. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are seated in an actual rock or jazz concert hall. 1 Press MOVIE to select the movie CINEMA DSP program. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press SPORTS to select the sports CINEMA DSP program. SPORTS TV/AV YSP 2 Press MUSIC to select the music CINEMA DSP program. MUSIC 7 64 En 9 Using sound field programs ■ Turning off CINEMA DSP programs Turn off the CINEMA DSP programs if you want to enjoy the original sound without the CINEMA DSP program effect. 2 Press MUSIC, MOVIE, or SPORTS to select the desired CINEMA DSP program. MUSIC 1 TV/AV YSP 2 7 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 3 MOVIE or 8 SPORTS or 9 Press / . “DSP LEVEL” is displayed in the front panel display. ENTRY Press OFF to turn off the CINEMA DSP programs. “CINEMA DSP OFF” is displayed in the front panel display and the CINEMA DSP indicator disappears. ENTER OFF 0 DSP LEVEL 0dB CINEMA DSP OFF 4 Press / to adjust the effect level of the selected CINEMA DSP program. You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. However, you can also adjust the effect level of the CINEMA DSP programs relative to the level of the direct sound so that each CINEMA DSP program can reflect your listening environment and your preference even more accurately. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. BASIC OPERATION ■ Adjusting CINEMA DSP effect levels ENTER Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB • A larger value increases the effect level. • A smaller value decreases the effect level. TV/AV YSP English 65 En USING THE MUSIC ENHANCER Using the music enhancer You can use the Music Enhancer of this unit to improve the sound nearest to the original depth and width of compression artifacts such as the MP3 format. MUSIC MOVIE 7 8 OFF SPORTS 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER 3 Press ENHANCER repeatedly to switch between the Music Enhancer levels (OFF, MIN, and MAX). MENU ENHANCER TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH TV VOL ENHANCER:HIGH (U.S.A. and Canada models) ENHANCER:LOW 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 ENHANCER OFF The ENHANCER indicator lights up when “ENHANCER:HIGH” or “ENHANCER:LOW” is selected. Press ENHANCER to select the Music Enhancer. The currently selected mode appears in the front panel display. Lights up ENHANCER Notes • The Music Enhancer is not compatible with the CINEMA DSP programs. If a CINEMA DSP program is selected while the Music Enhancer is on, the Music Enhancer is turned off automatically. In this case, the Music Enhancer remains off even after the CINEMA DSP program is canceled. Likewise, if the Music Enhancer is turned on while a CINEMA DSP program is selected, the CINEMA DSP program is canceled automatically. In this case, the CINEMA DSP program remains off even after the Music Enhancer is turned off. • The Music Enhancer is available only when a setting other than My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode. 66 En USING THE VOLUME MODE (NIGHT LISTENING ENHANCER/TV VOLUME EQUAL MODE) Using the volume mode (Night listening enhancer/TV volume equal mode) The night listening enhancers are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. In addition, you can limit the volume level of the TV so that it will not vary suddenly to a great extent whenever the contents being broadcast change (i.e. due to commercials, etc.). The EQUAL indicator lights up in the front panel display when “TV EQUAL VOLUME” is selected. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3BEAM 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 Lights up SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and to make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select TV EQUAL VOLUME when watching TV programs. • Select OFF to turn off the volume mode. MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP Press / to adjust the effect level of compression while NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, or TV EQUAL VOLUME is displayed. Press VOL MODE repeatedly to select NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, TV EQUAL VOLUME, or OFF. ENTER BASIC OPERATION 2 3 VOL MODE Effect.Lvl:MIN NIGHT:CINEMA Effect.Lvl:MID NIGHT:MUSIC Effect.Lvl:MAX TV EQUAL VOLUME OFF The NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected. • Select Effect.Lvl:MIN for minimum compression. • Select Effect.Lvl:MID for standard compression. • Select Effect.Lvl:MAX for maximum compression. Notes Lights up 67 En English • The volume mode settings are canceled if you press STANDBY/ON or disconnect the AC power supply cable from the AC wall outlet. • The volume mode settings become ineffective when My Surround is selected as the beam mode (see page 55). USING THE SLEEP TIMER Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a specified period of time. The sleep timer is useful if you are going to sleep after a certain amount of time while this unit is still playing back a source. FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 ENHANCER CAT/ A-E SLEEP 3BEAM 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY SLEEP 90min SLEEP 60min SLEEP 30min SLEEP OFF MENU ENTER YSP RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 3 TV/AV YSP 2 120min TV/AV DISPLAY 1 SLEEP Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the interval for the sleep timer. Choices: 120min, 90min, 60min, 30min, OFF The SLEEP indicator flashes in the front panel display while switching the interval for the sleep timer. SLEEP Flashes 68 En Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is activated. Lights up Using the sleep timer ■ Canceling the sleep timer 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. SLEEP SLEEP 3 OFF Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit to confirm the setting for the sleep timer. The SLEEP indicator disappears from the front panel display, indicating that the sleep timer is deactivated. Disappears BASIC OPERATION Note The previous setting for the sleep timer before you deactivate it is stored in the system memory. y The sleep timer setting can also be deactivated if you press STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the standby mode or unplug the AC power supply cable from the AC outlet. English 69 En DISPLAYING THE INPUT SOURCE INFORMATION Displaying the input source information You can display the format and sampling frequency of the current input signal in the front panel display. 7 8 OFF 2 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU Press DISPLAY. The information on the current input signal is displayed as follows: DISPLAY TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE D.DGTL:48kHz or (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP INPUT SIGNAL DOLBY DGTL:48kHz Input signal Indicator Dolby digital DOLBY DGTL DTS DTS PCM PCM Analog ANALOG Sampling frequency 32/44.1/48/64/ 88.2/96 kHz – y When the input signal is unclear, “___” is displayed for the sampling frequency. 70 En USING THE HDMI CONTROL FEATURE Using the HDMI control feature You can operate the following functions using the remote control supplied with your TV if this unit and an HDMI control-compatible TV (except some models) are connected via HDMI. • Turning on or off the power (synchronized operation with the TV) • Selecting the audio output component (TV or this unit) • Adjusting the volume level (up/down and mute) An example of the HDMI control-compatible component is a Panasonic EZ Sync (for U.S.A. and Canada) or Viera Link (for other countries)-compatible component (TV, DVD recorder, Blu-ray recorder, etc.). y If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player via HDMI, you can also control the connected component in synchronization with this unit (except some models). Connect this unit to your HDMI control-compatible TV via HDMI. For details about HDMI and HDMI components, see “Information on HDMI™” on page 20 and “Connections using HDMI cables” on page 21. Also in the owner’s manual supplied with your TV, refer to the information on connecting an AV amplifier. 2 Turn on the power of all components connected via HDMI. For details about controlling external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components. 3 Check the system settings for all components connected via HDMI and activate the HDMI control feature. For details about setting external components, see the owner’s manuals supplied with your components. Once you have followed steps 1 to 3, you do not need to carry out the same procedure again next time. 4 Turn off the power of your TV and then turn on the power again. 5 Set the input source selector of your TV to this unit (HDMI, etc.). 6 Select the connected component as the input source by pressing INPUT on the front panel of this unit (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). Confirm that the video image played back on the DVD recorder (etc.) appears in your TV correctly. 7 Use the remote control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output component, and adjust the volume level of this unit. BASIC OPERATION 1 Notes • Check the following if you cannot operate this unit in synchronization with your TV. – Whether HDMI CONTROL is set to ON (see page 82). – Whether the HDMI control feature is activated for your TV (see the owner’s manual supplied with your TV). • While you are playing back audio from a non-HDMI component, turning off the power of your TV with the remote control supplied with your TV does not turn off the power of this unit. Playback continues without being affected. English 71 En MANUAL SETUP MANUAL SETUP To achieve the best quality surround sound, you can use MANUAL SETUP to fine-tune the listening environment parameters, as well as to make advanced settings for sound signals, sound beams, digital input, and the OSD. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your own listening environment. y • You can save the settings optimized by the AUTO SETUP procedure (see page 42). A set of settings optimized according to the specific conditions of your listening environment can be recalled later depending on the varying conditions of your listening environment (see page 43). • Most of the parameters in SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU are automatically set when you run AUTO SETUP (see page 35). Use SOUND MENU and BEAM MENU to make additional adjustments. • BEAM MENU allows you to make settings for the surround sound effects normally available in the speaker settings menu. • Make settings for the parameters in BEAM MENU first before making settings for the parameters in SOUND MENU, INPUT MENU, and DISPLAY MENU. SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output. Item Features Page TONE CONTROL Adjusts the output level of high-frequency or low-frequency sound. 78 SUBWOOFER SET Adjusts the various subwoofer settings. 78 MUTE LEVEL Adjusts the muting level. 78 AUDIO DELAY Adjusts the audio delay. 79 ROOM EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the listening room. 79 DD/DTS Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 79 TruBass Selects the bass sound enhancer. 79 BEAM MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output. Item Features Page SETTING PARAMETERS Adjusts the listening room and listening position settings. 74 BEAM ADJUSTMENT Adjusts the various sound beam settings. 75 IMAGE LOCATION Adjusts the sound position of the front left and right channels. 77 INPUT MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input. Item Features Page INPUT ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 80 INPUT MODE Selects the initial input of the source. 80 INPUT TRIM Adjusts the input level of the source. 80 INPUT RENAME Renames the displayed input source. 81 HDMI SET Adjusts the various HDMI settings. 81 XM ANTENNA LEVEL (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Displays the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signal. 82 DISPLAY MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display. Item Features Page F.DISPLAY SET Adjusts the front panel display settings. 83 OSD SET Adjusts the OSD settings. 83 UNIT SET Changes the display unit of measurement. 83 72 En MANUAL SETUP Using MANUAL SETUP 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. MUSIC MOVIE 7 8 SPORTS 9 OFF 0 SUR. DECODE ENTER +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME Press / to select MANUAL SETUP and press ENTER. The following screen appears on your TV. RETURN CH ;MANUAL SETUP TV VOL . 1)SOUND MENU 2)BEAM MENU 3)INPUT MENU 4)DISPLAY MENU (U.S.A. and Canada models) p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y You can adjust the SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 4 Press / ENTER. to select a sub menu and press TV/AV YSP ENTER ENTER 2 Press MENU. The SET MENU screen appears on your TV. SET MENU MENU 5 . ;MEMORY ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP ;LANGUAGE SETUP Press / / / each parameter. and ENTER to configure ADVANCED OPERATION p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ENTER y • The control buttons used for SET MENU are displayed at the bottom of the screen. • To return to the previous screen while using SET MENU, press RETURN. • To exit from the SET MENU screen, press MENU once more. • You can also perform the following operations in the front panel display. 6 Press MENU to exit. The OSD disappears from your TV screen. MENU English 73 En MANUAL SETUP BEAM MENU ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER FLAT TO WALL Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound beam output. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → BEAM MENU 2)BEAM MENU . A)SETTING PARAMETERS B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT C)IMAGE LOCATION p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter y You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel in “Adjusting the audio balance” (see page 84). • Select FLAT TO WALL if this unit is installed in parallel with the wall in your listening room. Adjust the width and length of your listening room as well as the distance of the listening position from this unit and the distance of the center of this unit from the left wall. Listening position from the left wall ■ SETTING PARAMETERS (Setting parameters) Use to set the position of this unit in your listening room and the distance of this unit from the listening position. When you make settings for each parameter, other related parameters are automatically adjusted to best match your listening environment. Listening position from the unit Room length Room width Note Choices for the room width and length: 2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from this unit: 1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from the left wall: 0.6 m to 11.4 m (2.0 ft to 38.0 ft) A)SETTING PARAMETERS 1/3 A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3 . INSTALLED POSITION ;;;;;;;FLAT TO WALL p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return | -------[ 5.4m ]| 4.9m | Room width and length p p If you make adjustments in SETTING PARAMETERS, the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP procedure will be lost. If you want to keep the beam optimization settings made in the AUTO SETUP and make further adjustments, adjust settings in BEAM ADJUSTMENT first (see page 75). A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3 Listening position from the unit and the left wall --------| 2.7m [ 2.5m ] | p p INSTALLED POSITION (Installed position of this unit) Use to adjust the installed position of this unit. Choices: FLAT TO WALL (Parallel to wall installation), ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER (Corner installation) p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return 74 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return MANUAL SETUP • Select ANGLE TO WALL OR CORNER if this unit is installed in the corner of your listening room. Adjust the width and length of your listening room as well as the distance of the listening position from this unit. Listening position from the unit ■ BEAM ADJUSTMENT (Beam adjustment) Use to manually adjust the various sound beam settings. We recommend that you select 5 Beam as the beam mode before adjusting these parameters (see page 54). Notes • When INSTALLED POSITION is adjusted in MANUAL SETUP (see page 74), the factory default value is automatically set for this parameter except Center in FOCAL LENGTH (see page 76). • Depending on the beam mode settings (see pages 54 and 60), some channel positions may not be available for selection. In this case, “– –” is displayed. When using Stereo plus 3 Beam as the beam mode, set the surround left and right signals to be output from the front left and right channels. Room width Room length B)BEAM ADJUSTMENT . a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH c)FOCAL LENGTH d)TREBLE GAIN p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Choices for the room width and length: 2.0 m to 12.0 m (6.5 ft to 40.0 ft) Choices for the listening position from this unit: 1.8 m to 9.0 m (6.0 ft to 30.0 ft) A)SETTING PARAMETERS 2/3 ----- 5.4m --- Room width and length p p | [ 5.4m ] | | p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return HORIZONTAL ANGLE (Horizontal angle) Use to adjust the horizontal angle of sound beams for each channel. By adjusting the horizontal angle of the sound beams, you can optimize the sound beam paths. A test tone is automatically output. ( ) (+) (+) ( ) A)SETTING PARAMETERS 3/3 p p Note When you set the INSTALLED POSITION parameter in MANUAL SETUP (see page 74), the parameters newly set for the width and length of your listening room are automatically set as the factory default value. Choices: L90° to R90° Adjust toward L (left) to move the direction of the output to the left and adjust toward R (right) to move it to the right. a)HORIZONTAL ANGLE5 beam 1/5 Front L L65deg L90 R90 * p p 0(deg) p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return ADVANCED OPERATION \ [ 2.5m ] \ Listening position from the unit p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return English 75 En MANUAL SETUP BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH (Beam travel length) A certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each channel so that all sounds can arrive at the listening position at the same time. This menu sets the distance that sound beams travel after being output and reflected off the wall until they arrive at the listening position and adjusts the delay applied to the respective channel. The lines in the illustration below indicate the distance. FOCAL LENGTH (Focal length) Use to set the distance from the front of this unit to the focal point of output for each channel to achieve an expansive feeling for each channel. The focal points except for the center channel should be set near the reflection points on the walls. The shorter the distance, the larger the expansion. focal length focal point sweet spot Choices: 0.3 m to 24.0 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft) • Front L adjusts the distance the front left channel sound beams travel. • Front R adjusts the distance the front right channel sound beams travel. • Center adjusts the distance the center channel sound beams travel. • Surround L adjusts the distance the surround left channel sound beams travel. • Surround R adjusts the distance the surround right channel sound beams travel. b)BEAM TRAVEL LENGTH 5 beam . Front L;;;;;;;6.0m Front R;;;;;;;6.0m Center;;;;;;;;2.5m Surround L;;;;9.1m Surround R;;;;9.1m p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return y We recommend that you use the setting optimized by AUTO SETUP (see page 35). Adjust this parameter only when you changed HORIZONTAL ANGLE (see page 75). Front left channel Center channel Choices: –1.0 m to +13.0 m (–3.5 ft to +43.5 ft) Adjust toward – (minus) to move the focus outward and adjust toward + (plus) to move the focus toward the normal position. • Front L adjusts the focal length for the front left sound beams. • Front R adjusts the focal length for the front right sound beams. • Center adjusts the focal length for the center sound beams. Initial setting: –0.5 m (–1.5 ft) • Surround L adjusts the focal length for the surround left sound beams. • Surround R adjusts the focal length for the surround right sound beams. y We recommend that you use the initial setting (–0.5 m (or 1.5 ft)) for the center channel. c)FOCAL LENGTH 5 beam . Front L;;;;;;+1.5m Front R;;;;;;+1.5m Center;;;;;;;-0.5m Surround L;;;+2.3m Surround R;;;+2.3m p p 76 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return MANUAL SETUP TREBLE GAIN (Treble gain) Use to adjust the high-frequency output level of each channel. y If the reflection points of the front left and right or surround left and right sound beams are on curtain or other acoustically absorbent surfaces, you can achieve more effective surround sound by increasing the treble level for those sound beams. ■ IMAGE LOCATION (Image location) Use to adjust the direction from which the front left and right channel sound is heard so that each sound can be heard closer to the center channel. Use this feature to redirect audio signals if the sound coming from the front left and right channels seems unnatural, such as when your listening position is not the center of your listening room. You can only adjust this parameter when 3 Beam or 5 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 54). Choices: ON, OFF Setting range: 0% to 95% Initial setting: 0% C)IMAGE LOCATION . OFF L C )ON R p LEFT;;;;;;;;;;;0% RIGHT;;;;;;;;;;0% p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p Choices: –12.0 dB to +12.0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB • Front L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the front left channel. • Front R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the front right channel. • Center adjusts the high-frequency output level of the center channel. • Surround L adjusts the high-frequency output level of the surround left channel. • Surround R adjusts the high-frequency output level of the surround right channel. LEFT (Left) Adjusts audio signals toward the left. The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center. Without adjustment With the front left channel adjusted d)TREBLE GAIN + . Front L;;;;;;;;0dB -----Front R;;;;;;;;0dB -----Center;;;;;;;;;0dB -----Surround L;;;;;0dB -----Surround R;;;;;0dB ------ p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return Without adjustment ADVANCED OPERATION RIGHT (Right) Adjusts audio signals toward the right. The higher the percentage, the louder the output from the center. With the front right channel adjusted English 77 En 01EN_YSP-3000_UA.book Page 78 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:36 AM MANUAL SETUP Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the sound output. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → SOUND MENU 1)SOUND MENU p p . A)TONE CONTROL B)SUBWOOFER SET C)MUTE LEVEL D)AUDIO DELAY E)ROOM EQ F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range G)TruBass [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ TONE CONTROL (Tone control) You can adjust the tonal quality of sound beams. + TREBLE;;;;;0dB -----+ BASS;;;;;;;0dB ------ p p . A)TONE CONTROL- p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return TREBLE (Treble) Use to adjust the high-frequency response. Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB Initial setting: 0 dB BASS (Bass) Use to adjust the low-frequency response. Choices: –12 dB to +12 dB Initial setting: 0 dB ■ SUBWOOFER SET (Subwoofer settings) Use to manually adjust the various subwoofer settings. B)SUBWOOFER SET . BASS OUT;;;;;FRONT CROSS OVER;;;100Hz LFE LEVEL;;;;;;0dB DISTANCE;;;;;;3.0m p p 78 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return BASS OUT (Bass out) Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer or the front left and right channels. This setting also determines the routing of LFE (low-frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR (Subwoofer), FRONT • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer. • Select FRONT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front left and right channels. CROSS OVER (Crossover) When BASS OUT is set to SWFR, you can use this feature to select a crossover (cutoff) frequency for all lowfrequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer position. Choices: 80Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz LFE LEVEL (Low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 dB DISTANCE (Distance) Select to adjust the distance of the subwoofer from the listening position. Choices: 0.3 to 15.0 m (1.0 ft to 50.0 ft) Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) ■ MUTE LEVEL (Muting level) Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the volume level. Choices: MUTE, –20 dB • Select MUTE to completely halt all sound output. • Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume level by 20 dB. C)MUTE LEVEL pMUTE p p SOUND MENU -20dB [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return MANUAL SETUP ■ AUDIO DELAY (Audio delay) Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 160 msec D)AUDIO DELAY AUDIO DELAY;;;;;0msec p p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return ■ DD/DTS Dynamic Range (Dynamic range of Dolby Digital and DTS signals) Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Dynamic range is the difference between the smallest sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the biggest sound that can be heard without distortion. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) F)DD/DTS Dynamic Range MIN Use to change the tonal qualities of your listening room when the unit is mounted on the wall. Choices: MOUNTING (Mount type), REFLECTING (Reflectivity type) [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return REFLECTING (Reflectivity type) Use to select the reflectivity of your listening room. Choices: NORMAL (Normal), HI ECHO (High echo) • Select NORMAL if your listening room has a normal reflectivity. • Select HI ECHO if your listening room has highly reflective surfaces such as concrete walls. ■ TruBass Use to turn on or off the bass sound enhancer. The SRS TruBass technology improves bass even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer. Choices: OFF, ON G)TruBass pON OFF p ADVANCED OPERATION MOUNTING (Mounting type) Use to enhance medium to low range sounds. Choices: WALL (Wall mount), SHELF (Shelf mount) • Select WALL if this unit is mounted on the wall in your listening room. • Select SHELF if this unit is mounted on the shelf in your listening room. Select to adjust the dynamic range compression. • Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels. • Select STD for general use. • Select MAX for feature films. p REFLECTING;;;NORMAL p E)ROOM EQ . MOUNTING;;;;;SHELF p STD pMAX ■ ROOM EQ (Room equalizer) [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return Note TruBass is not available when My Beam (see page 61) or My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode. English 79 En MANUAL SETUP ■ INPUT MODE (Input mode) INPUT MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the audio and video input. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → INPUT MENU Use to designate the input mode for the input sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on the power of this unit. For information on the types of audio signals that can be output by this unit, see “Selecting the input mode” on page 87. Choices: AUTO, LAST 3)INPUT MENU B)INPUT MODE . A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT B)INPUT MODE C)INPUT TRIM D)INPUT RENAME E)HDMI SET F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL pAUTO p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return “F) XM ANTENNA LEVEL” is for U.S.A. and Canada models only. ■ INPUT ASSIGNMENT (Input assignment) AUX1 AUX1 DVD DVD ) p p ) 80 En p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return Use to adjust the input level of the input source. C)INPUT TRIM 1/2 . TV/STB DVD ANALOG;;;-3.0dB DIGITAL;;-3.0dB DIGITAL;;-3.0dB p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p A)INPUT ASSIGNMENT ■ INPUT TRIM (Input trim) p Use to assign the HDMI IN jacks of this unit to other components if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. By assigning other components to the HDMI IN jacks of this unit, you can display the names of the connected components in the front panel display and OSD and operate the components with the input selector buttons of the same name. If you connect a component to one of the HDMI IN jacks of this unit and do not assign a name to it, the default component name for HDMI IN jack is displayed in the front panel and OSD when selected. • Select HDMI1 to assign a component to the HDMI AUX 1 IN jack of this unit. Choices: TV/STB, AUX1 • Select HDMI2 to assign a component to the HDMI DVD IN jack of this unit. Choices: DVD, AUX2 • Select AUTO to set this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that input source. If the type of input signals is different from the setting, no sounds will be produced. p Note HDMI . HDMI1;;;; ( HDMI2;;;; ( p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter LAST • Select TV/STB ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the TV/STB AUDIO INPUT jacks of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select TV/STB DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the TV/STB OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select DVD DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB MANUAL SETUP • Select AUX1 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX1 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX2 DIGITAL to adjust the level of audio and video signals input at the AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT jack of this unit. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select AUX3 ANALOG to adjust the level of audio signals input at the AUX 3 input jack on the front panel. Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB • Select DOCK ANALOG to adjust the level of audio signals input at the DOCK terminal of this unit (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only). Control range: –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB Initial setting: –3.0 dB 2 Press / to select the desired character. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press to change the character in the following order or press to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, etc. ENTER 3 Repeat steps 1 to 2 to rename each input. 4 Press ENTER to exit. The new names are registered, and the display returns to the previous screen. ENTER ■ INPUT RENAME (Input rename) Use to change the name of the input source in the OSD and the front panel display. Press an input selector button (e.g., DVD) to select the component you want to change the name for and perform the following procedure. D)INPUT RENAME DVD -> p p DVD p p Use to change the HDMI audio/video output/input to match the connected component. Choices: SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio), VIDEO INFO (Video information), HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control) E)HDMI SET ADVANCED OPERATION [ ]/[ ]:Position [ ]/[ ]:Character [ENTER]:Return ■ HDMI SET (HDMI settings) . a)SUPPORT AUDIO b)VIDEO INFO c)HDMI CONTROL [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p Press / to place the _ (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. The _ (underscore) flashes. p 1 ENTER English 81 En MANUAL SETUP SUPPORT AUDIO (Support audio) Use to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Choices: YSP-3000, OTHER a)SUPPORT AUDIO pYSP-3000 OTHER c)HDMI CONTROL p p HDMI CONTROL (HDMI control) Use this function to link this unit and an HDMI controlcompatible TV via HDMI. You can turn on or off the power, select the input mode, and adjust the volume level of this unit using the remote control supplied with your HDMI control-compatible TV. For details, see “Using the HDMI control feature” on page 71. Choices: OFF, ON [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return OFF pON XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX p [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return p Notes • This setting is effective when HDMI CONTROL is set to OFF (see right). • When HDMI CONTROL is set to ON, this setting is ineffective. This unit follows the settings of the HDMI control-compatible TV. • The HDMI video signals input at one of the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. VIDEO INFO (Video information) Use to display the video information of the current input signal. Choices: HDMI RES., HDMI ERROR b)VIDEO INFO • Select ON to enable the HDMI control. The signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode. • Select OFF to disable the HDMI control. The signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is in the standby mode. ■ XM ANTENNA LEVEL (XM antenna level) (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use to display the current reception level of the XM Satellite Radio signals. For the best reception, orient the connected XM Mini-Tuner Dock to obtain a value of 60% or more. Display status: NONE, 0 to 100% . HDMI RES.;;;;1080P HDMI ERROR;;;---- F)XM ANTENNA LEVEL p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Return XM ANTENNA LEVEL;;;;97% • Select HDMI RES. to display the resolution of the HDMI input/output signals. • Select HDMI ERROR to display the error message for HDMI sources or devices connected (see page 104 for details). [ENTER]:Return Note “NONE” is displayed if the XM Mini-Tuner Dock is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 5 in the Reference Guide). 82 En MANUAL SETUP ■ OSD SET (OSD settings) DISPLAY MENU Use to manually adjust the various parameters related to the display. SET MENU → MANUAL SETUP → DISPLAY MENU Use to adjust the display position and to set the display time of the OSD. B)OSD SET . OSD SHIFT;;;;;;;;;;0 4)DISPLAY MENU OSD DISPLAY TIME;;;ON p p . A)F.DISPLAY SET B)OSD SET C)UNIT SET p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ F.DISPLAY SET (Front panel display settings) Use to adjust the brightness and display settings of the front panel display. A)F.DISPLAY SET . STANDARD DIMMER;;;;;OFF AUTO DIMMER ;;;;;;;;;;;;;OFF SCROLL;;;;;;;;;;;;CONT. p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [ ]/[ ]:Sel [ENTER]:Return OSD SHIFT (OSD shift) Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Adjust toward the – (minus) direction to raise the position of the OSD, and adjust toward the + (plus) direction to lower it. Choices: –5 to +5 Initial setting: 0 OSD DISPLAY TIME (OSD display time) (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Use to set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed after an operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select ON to show the OSD screen constantly. • Select 10s to turn off the OSD screen 10 seconds after an operation. • Select 30s to turn off the OSD screen 30 seconds after an operation. STANDARD DIMMER (Standard dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display when you operate this unit by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. Choices: –2, –1, OFF y AUTO DIMMER (Auto dimmer) If no operation is performed for a specified period of time, the front panel display dims. Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display in this case. Choices: OFF (the same brightness as the STANDARD DIMMER setting), –1 to –3 (based on the STANDARD DIMMER setting), DISPLAY OFF Use this to change the display unit of measurement. Choices: METERS (Australia, Europe, Asia, and Korea models), FEET (U.S.A. and Canada models) ■ UNIT SET (Unit settings) C)UNIT SET p METERS p p FEET ADVANCED OPERATION SCROLL (Front panel display scroll) (U.S.A., Canada, and Australia models only) Use to select the mode to display information in the front panel display when operating your iPod or XM Satellite Radio. Choices: CONT., ONCE • Select CONT. to continue to scroll the display. • Select ONCE to scroll the display to the end once, after which the first 15 characters appear and stay. The OSD display time setting is available for your iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). For details, see pages 4 and 10 in the Reference Guide. [ ]/[ ]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select METERS to enter distances in meters. • Select FEET to enter distances in feet. Note 83 En English If you change this setting, the adjusted sound beam settings may change. Adjusting the audio balance Adjusting the audio balance You can adjust the sound beam output level of each channel by using the test tone or the audio output being played back in each beam mode to achieve a more true-to-life surround sound experience. Using the test tone 3 You can use the test tone feature to output a test tone from each channel to manually balance the channel levels. Use this to set the channel levels so that the volume level of each channel is identical when heard from your listening position. Press / to select the channel you want to adjust. The front panel display changes as follows: TEST FRONT L ENTER ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER TEST CENTER MENU TEST FRONT R TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN TEST SUR.R VOLUME CH TV VOL TEST SUR.L MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TEST SUBWOOFER TV MUTE CODE SET Note (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 “TEST SUBWOOFER” is only available when a subwoofer is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 78). Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV 4 Press / to adjust the channel volume. YSP 2 Press TEST. “TEST FRONT L” appears in the front panel display and a test tone is output from the front left channel. ENTER Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB TEST TEST FRONT L 84 En Adjusting the audio balance 5 Press TEST when you have completed all your adjustments. 1 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV TEST YSP 2 Notes • All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or 5channel stereo playback (see page 60), My Beam (see page 61), or My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode. • “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 55). • “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 55 and 60). Press CH LEVEL repeatedly (or press CH LEVEL and / ) to select the channel you want to adjust. The front panel display changes as follows. CH LEVEL or CH LEVEL y ENTER If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB” appears in the front panel display. Using the audio output being played back You can also manually adjust the channel levels while playing back an input source such as a DVD. ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME FRONT L +1.0dB CENTER -2.5dB FRONT R +1.0dB SUR.R +2.0dB SUR.L +2.0dB RETURN CH TV VOL MUTE CH LEVEL TV INPUT TEST --dB TV MUTE CODE SET (U.S.A. and Canada models) Note ADVANCED OPERATION SWFR “SWFR” is available only when a subwoofer is connected to this unit and SWFR is selected for BASS OUT in SOUND MENU (see page 78). English 85 En Adjusting the audio balance 3 Press / to adjust the channel volume. ENTER Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB 4 Wait for a few seconds without operating this unit when you have completed your adjustment. Notes • All channel levels cannot be adjusted when the 2-channel or 5channel stereo playback (see page 60), or My Surround (see page 55) is selected as the beam mode. • “FRONT L/R” cannot be adjusted when Stereo plus 3 Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 55). • Only CENTER can be adjusted when My Beam is selected as the beam mode (see page 61). • “FRONT L/R” are automatically adjusted depending on the settings of the other channels when Stereo plus 3 Beam or stereo playback is selected as the beam mode (see pages 55 and 60). y If the level of a particular channel cannot be adjusted, “– –dB” appears in the front panel display. 86 En Selecting the input mode Selecting the input mode You can select the type of audio input signals of the selected input source according to your preference or the conditions of the input source. This function is available for TV/STB, DVD, AUX1, and AUX2. y We recommend setting the input mode to AUTO in most cases. AV 3 TV DOCK DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 Press INPUTMODE repeatedly to toggle between input modes. AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT INPUTMODE MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 3BEAM 9 DVD AUTO TV/STB AUTO DVD DTS TV/STB DTS TV/STB ANALOG SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU When DVD is selected as the input source TV/AV AUX1 AUTO AUX1 DTS AUX1 ANALOG YSP DISPLAY RETURN (U.S.A. and Canada models) When AUX1 is selected as the input source 1 When TV or STB is selected as the input source AUX2 AUTO AUX2 DTS When AUX2 is selected as the input source Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Note TV/AV ANALOG is not available as the input mode of DVD and AUX2. YSP Press one of the input selector buttons to select the desired input source. DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 • AUTO Automatically selects audio input signals in the following priority order: 1) HDMI 2) Digital 3) Analog ADVANCED OPERATION 2 y Use this input mode in most cases. • DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. Compared to AUTO, this input mode provides greater stability while playing back CDs or LDs encoded in DTS. • ANALOG Selects only analog signals. Even when both digital and analog signals are input simultaneously, only analog signals are selected. You can adjust the default input mode to be selected when the power of this unit is turned on by adjusting INPUT MODE in INPUT MENU (see page 80). 87 En English y Adjusting the system parameters Adjusting the system parameters This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. These menus offer additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Note When “F.PANEL KEY” is set to “F.PANEL: OFF” (see page 93), STANDBY/ON on the front panel is ineffective. Use STANDBY/ON on the remote control instead to adjust the system parameters. Using the system parameters 2 Follow the procedure below to enter the system parameters. Press and hold INPUT on the front panel and press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to turn on the power of this unit. “MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front panel display. STANDBY/ON INPUT MEMORY PROTECT INPUT VOLUME + STANDBY/ON 3 STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV ENHANCER ENTRY AUX1 STB TV AUX2 CAT/ A-E ENTER INPUT AUX3 TV/AV TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM DISPLAY PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MENU TV DOCK DVD YSP RETURN MEMORY (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to turn off the power of this unit. STANDBY/ON 88 En Release INPUT on the front panel. Adjusting the system parameters Setting the MEMORY PROTECT 4 You can protect the settings you saved in the system memory of this unit from being accidentally erased or unwantedly changed. Press / to switch between “PROTECT: ON” and “PROTECT: OFF”. ENTER 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV PROTECT: ON YSP 3 Confirm that “MEMORY PROTECT” is displayed in the front panel display and press ENTER. PROTECT: OFF • Select PROTECT: ON to activate the protection feature. • Select PROTECT: OFF to deactivate the protection feature. MEMORY PROTECT 5 ENTER Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ADVANCED OPERATION English 89 En Adjusting the system parameters Setting the MAX VOLUME 5 You can set the maximum volume level so that this unit will not output sound beyond the limited volume level. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. Press level. / to adjust the maximum volume ENTER Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, MIN Control step: 1 “ TV/AV YSP 3 6 Press / so that “MAX VOLUME SET” is displayed in the front panel display. Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting for the maximum volume level will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ENTER Setting the TURN ON VOLUME You can set the initial volume level when the power of this unit is turned on. MAX VOLUME SET 4 Press ENTER. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV ENTER 90 En YSP Adjusting the system parameters 3 Press / so that “TURN ON VOLUME” is displayed in the front panel display. ENTER Setting the DEMO MODE You can test the sound beam output from this unit to experience the sound beam. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP TURN ON VOLUME 3 4 Press ENTER. Press / so that “DEMO MODE” is displayed in the front panel display. ENTER ENTER 5 Press / to adjust the initial volume level. DEMO MODE ENTER Control range: MAX, 99 to 01, OFF Control step: 1 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. Press ENTER. ADVANCED OPERATION 6 4 ENTER STANDBY/ON The new setting for the maximum volume level will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. English 91 En Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “DEMO: ON” and “DEMO: OFF”. ENTER Setting the PANEL INPUT KEY You can disable the INPUT on the front panel when you adjust the system parameters. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV DEMO: YSP ON 3 DEMO: Press / so that “PANEL INPUT KEY” is displayed in the front panel display. OFF ENTER • Select DEMO: ON to activate the demo mode. • Select DEMO: OFF to deactivate the demo mode. 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. PANEL INPUT KEY STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Press ENTER while playing back sources to test the sound beam. The sound beam being output shuttles between left and right. Press ENTER again to stop shuttling. 92 En 4 Press ENTER. ENTER Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “P.INPUT: ON” and “P.INPUT: OFF”. ENTER Disabling the front panel keys You can disable the front panel keys except when you adjust the system parameters. 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV P.INPUT: YSP ON 3 P.INPUT: Press / so that “F.PANEL KEY” is displayed in the front panel display. OFF ENTER • Select P.INPUT: ON to enable the INPUT key on the front panel. • Select P.INPUT: OFF to disable the INPUT key on the front panel. “F.PANEL KEY” is automatically set to “ON”. 6 F.PANEL KEY Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON Press ENTER. ENTER ADVANCED OPERATION The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 4 English 93 En Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “F.PANEL: ON” and “F.PANEL: OFF”. ENTER Setting the FACTORY PRESET You can reset all of the parameters of this unit to the factory presets. This procedure completely resets ALL the parameters in SET MENU. Note After performing the following procedure you must run AUTO SETUP again to match your surround sound environment. F.PANEL: ON 1 Repeat steps 1 to 3 in “Using the system parameters” on page 88. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. TV/AV YSP F.PANEL: OFF 3 Press / so that “FACTORY PRESET” is displayed in the front panel display. • Select F.PANEL: ON to enable the front panel keys. • Select F.PANEL: OFF to disable the front panel keys. “P.INPUT” is automatically set to “ON”. 6 ENTER Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON FACTORY PRESET The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. 4 Press ENTER. ENTER 94 En Adjusting the system parameters 5 Press / to switch between “PRESET: RESET” and “PRESET: CANCEL”. ENTER PRESET: RESET PRESET:CANCEL • Select PRESET: RESET to reset all of the current settings. • Select PRESET: CANCEL to cancel the resetting procedure. 6 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY/ON The new setting will be activated when you turn on the power of this unit next time. ADVANCED OPERATION English 95 En Remote control features Remote control features In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other AV components made by Yamaha and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes and set the operation mode selector to TV/AV to change the control area. Note Depending on the external AV component you are using, you may not be able to operate the component with the remote control, even if a remote control code is set. In this case, operate the component using the supplied remote control. Setting remote control codes 2 You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area (DVD, AUX1, AUX2, STB, and TV). For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. Press the numeric buttons to enter the remote control code while holding down CODE SET. Setting example: Yamaha DVD input area MY SUR. 6 TV MUTE Transmission indicator AV While holding down, press SPORTS 9 CODE SET TV SPORTS DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 9 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 3 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER MUTE CH LEVEL TV INPUT TEST TV MUTE CODE SET (U.S.A. and Canada models) Refer to “Controlling other components” on page 97 to operate the external component using the remote control. If the external component functions correctly the remote control code setup is successful. If the external component does not function correctly, the remote control code may be incorrect. Confirm that the remote control code is correct. See “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual and start over from step 1. Note 1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set a remote control code for. The transmission indicator flashes twice and remains lit. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE CODE SET 96 En While holding down, press DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. If the remote control is without batteries for more than two minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and reset the remote control codes. When changing the batteries, be careful not to press any of the buttons on the remote control. Doing so will clear the contents of the memory. Remote control features Controlling other components ■ Operating your TV Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV, and press TV to select TV as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the TV operation mode. TV/AV TV YSP STANDBY/ON 4 TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY 5 AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 1 4 5 6 MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 0 5 TV INPUT1 Selects the input source of your TV. 6 TV VOL +/– Adjusts the audio output level of your TV. 7 TV MUTE Temporarily mutes audio output from your TV. 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH TV VOL 2 3 3 TV INPUT Switches the input source for your TV. 3BEAM MUSIC OFF 2 CH +/– Switches between the available TV channels. 4 TV POWER Turns on or off the power of your TV. POWER POWER AV 1 Numeric buttons Selects a TV channel for playback. 6 MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET 7 ADVANCED OPERATION (U.S.A. and Canada models) English 97 En Remote control features ■ Operating your DVD player/recorder Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press DVD to select DVD as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the DVD operation mode. TV/AV ■ Operating your STB (CATV/Satellite tuner) Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press STB to select STB as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the STB operation mode. DVD YSP TV/AV STB YSP STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV 4 DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AUX3 AV TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT DOCK MEMORY ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 MY BEAM MY SUR. TV STB PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 4 5 6 5BEAM ST+3BEAM MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 1 2 3 7 8 9 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 0 ENHANCER 1 SUR. DECODE +10 ENTRY MENU 5 4 5 6 MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 0 ENTER 3BEAM MUSIC OFF TV/AV CAT/ A-E 3 AUX3 3BEAM STEREO OFF 2 AUX2 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM 5BEAM AUX1 DVD AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 1 TV TV STB 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU YSP DISPLAY VOLUME RETURN CH 6 TV VOL TV/AV YSP DISPLAY MUTE CH LEVEL TV INPUT TEST RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL 2 TV MUTE CODE SET TV MUTE CODE SET (U.S.A. and Canada models) 3 (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 2 Cursor buttons / / Use to select DVD menu items. 2 CH +/– Switches between the available STB channels. / , ENTER 3 Operation buttons for DVD players Operate your DVD player/recorder, such as play and stop. 4 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your DVD player/recorder. 5 MENU Displays the DVD menu. 6 RETURN Use to return to the previous DVD menu screen or exit from the DVD menu. 98 En 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 3 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your STB. Remote control features ■ Operating your VCR Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV and press AUX1 to select VCR as the input source. The control area of the remote control changes to the AUX1 operation mode. y This operation is available when your VCR is connected to the AUX 1 AUDIO INPUT jacks on this unit. TV/AV AUX1 YSP STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 4 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 1 3BEAM 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 0 9 SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT TV VOL 2 CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET ADVANCED OPERATION 3 (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Numeric buttons Enter numeric digits. 2 CH +/– Switches between the available VCR channels. 3 Operation buttons for VCR Operate your VCR, such as play and stop. 4 AV POWER Turns on or off the power of your VCR. English 99 En Remote control features ■ Setting macros for the TV with the tuning capability Using the TV macro The TV macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a DVD, you would normally turn on the component, select DVD as the input source, and press the play button to start playback. The TV macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the DVD macro button. 1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE While holding down, press Notes • Be sure to set up a remote control code for your TV before setting macros. • The ways to set macros differ if your TV does not have the tuning capability. • If you press any control buttons on the remote control other than the ones used to set macros while setting macros, the setting procedure is automatically canceled. • If it takes more than 10 seconds in steps 2 and 3, the setting procedure is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat from step 1. CODE SET 2 DVD AUX1 AUX2 STB Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE MACRO While holding down, press CODE SET STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK AUX1 DVD AUX2 AUX3 3 TV INPUT1 MACRO TV STB FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY Press CH +/– or the numeric buttons to select the TV channel. Check that the TV screen changes to the tuner screen. AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 CH OFF 0 or 9 CAT/ A-E ENTER 4 YSP VOLUME RETURN CH 6 SPORTS 7 8 9 +10 MENU TV/AV DISPLAY 5 MOVIE 0 +10 ENTRY 4 MUSIC OFF SUR. DECODE ENHANCER 3BEAM Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen changes to the display of the input source selected in step 1. TV VOL TV INPUT MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST TV MUTE CODE SET 5 Press ENTER to confirm the macro setting. (U.S.A. and Canada models) ENTER 100 En Remote control features ■ Setting macros for the TV without the tuning capability 1 Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to set macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE DVD Press and hold one of the input selector buttons for approximately two seconds to select the input source you want to operate macros for. The TV input changes at the same time the input mode changes. DVD AUX2 While holding down, press While holding down, press 1 MACRO CODE SET Press and hold CODE SET and press one of the input selector buttons to select the input source you want to cancel the macros for. Proceed to step 2 while holding down CODE SET. DVD TV MUTE Press INPUT1. Check that the TV screen changes to the input 1 screen. INPUT1 Press TV INPUT repeatedly until the screen changes to the display of the input source selected in step 1. TV INPUT AUX2 STB CODE SET 2 AUX1 While holding down, press Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE 4 AUX2 ■ Canceling the macros Press MACRO while holding down CODE SET. TV MUTE 3 AUX1 STB STB CODE SET 2 AUX1 ■ Operating macros While holding down, press MACRO CODE SET 3 Press ENTER to cancel the macros. ADVANCED OPERATION ENTER 5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting. ENTER English 101 En Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed, or enters the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. Cause Remedy See page The AC power supply cable is not firmly connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the AC power supply cable firmly to the AC wall outlet. 29 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the AC power supply cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, and use it normally. — The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait for about one hour for this unit to cool down and turn it back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 19 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT or the input selector buttons. 45 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. 47 The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume audio output and adjust the volume level. 47 The signals this unit cannot reproduce (such as PCM signals with more than 96 kHz of sampling frequency) are being received from the source component. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — Change the system settings of the source component. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect the HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 20 SUPPORT AUDIO is set to OTHER and HDMI audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set SUPPORT AUDIO to YSP-3000 in MANUAL SETUP 82 The sleep timer has turned this unit off. Turn on the power and play back the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– to resume audio output and adjust the volume level. 47 No sound from the effect channels. You are playing back the source or program in the 2-channel stereo playback or My Beam mode. Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control to select a multi-channel playback mode and play back the source or program once more. 54 No sound from the center channel. The output level of the center channel is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center channel. 84 No sound from the surround channels. The output level of the surround channels is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround channels. 84 This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. No sound. The sound suddenly goes off. 102 En Troubleshooting Problem No sound from the subwoofer. Cause BASS OUT in SUBWOOFER SET is set to FRONT. Remedy Select SWFR. See page 78 The source does not contain low bass signals. Distorted or too little bass sound. CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set incorrectly. Set CROSS OVER correctly. One of the night listening enhancers is currently selected. Turn off the night listening enhancers. TruBass is currently turned on. Turn off TruBass. 79 The volume level of the subwoofer is too high. Turn down the volume level of the subwoofer. — The listening room is not a regular shape. Install this unit in a square or rectangular shaped room. — There is no wall in the path of the sound beam. Try placing a flat object, such as a board, in the path of the sound beam. — Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played back. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator does not light up in the front panel display.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO. 87 There is noise interference when a subwoofer is not connected to this unit. The protection circuitry was in operation because a source with strong bass elements was played back. Turn down the volume level. 47 Select SWFR for BASS OUT. 78 Connect a subwoofer and adjust settings for SUBWOOFER SET. 78 Too much bass sound. Surround sound effects are insubstantial. 78 67 Set CROSS OVER correctly. 78 On-screen display does not appear. The OSD video pin cable is not connected properly. Connect the cable properly. 22 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power supply cable from the outlet and plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — No sound is heard from the TV connected via HDMI. The TV does not accept the multi-channel audio signals. Convert the multi-channel audio signals to the 2-channel audio signals at the source component such as a DVD player. — “SUPPORT AUDIO” is set to “YSP-3000”. Set “SUPPORT AUDIO” to “OTHER”. 82 There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit farther away from such equipment. — This unit does not output effect sounds properly. The original source includes surround effects. Disable the surround effect settings of this unit. — My Beam auto-adjust function does not work. The listening room is too noisy. Keep the listening room as quiet as possible. — Try manual-adjust function. 62 The sound reflectivity of the listening room is too much. Set REFLECTING to HI ECHO. 79 The remote control may be operated outside of the remote control operation range. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 45 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 30 The function does not work properly because of the condition of the connected components. Select My Beam and then try again. 61 103 En English CROSS OVER in SUBWOOFER SET is set incorrectly. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Low-frequency sounds are distorted. Troubleshooting ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work and/or function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 45 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 30 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 30 The external component you want to operate is not selected as the input source. Press INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the external component you want to operate. 45 The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly or try another code for the same manufacturer using the “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 96 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Use the remote control supplied with the external component. — The cursor buttons do not work during SET MENU operation. The operation mode selector was unwantedly set to TV/AV. Set the operation mode selector to YSP. — Cannot use the My Beam auto-adjust function. Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 45 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 30 Cannot operate external components with the remote control of this unit. ■ HDMI Error message Cause Remedy See page Device Error The number of the connected HDMI components exceeds the limit. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components. — HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP copy protection standards. — ■ FM tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 29 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 49 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 49 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 50 104 En Glossary Glossary ■ Dolby Digital ■ DTS Digital Surround Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low-frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1-channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround channels, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with excitement and realism previously unheard of. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right, and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1-channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Surround Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available: Music mode for playing music sources and Cinema mode for movies. ■ EUPHONY Euphony is a revolutionary sound field reproduction system implemented with state-of-the-art sound technologies developed under the basic concept of enjoying beautiful sound. It can reproduce surround sound optimized without depending on the number of input channels, the number of speakers (two or more speakers) or the speaker’s dimensions. In addition, it features steady center localization. It also can reproduce the surround sound for the headphones with natural sound and “out-ofhead” localization so that the listener feels an expanded sound and will not tire, even when listening to music or a movie for long time. ■ HDMI 105 En English HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced, or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS Neo:6 Glossary ■ LFE 0.1-channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduction by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for pulse code modulation, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ SRS TruBass SRS TruBass is a psychoacoustic bass enhancement technology developed by SRS Labs, Inc. for speakers and headphone systems that delivers bass up to an octave below the physical capabilities of the speaker’s driver. SRS TruBass technology takes advantage of a spontaneous tendency of the human ears to infer lowrange audio data when presented with higher-frequency harmonic signals. As a result, our ears can hear the original low-range sound that the speaker system is incapable of producing. 106 En Index Index ■ Numerics ■ M 3 Beam ............................................................................ 55 5 Beam ............................................................................ 54 MANUAL SETUP ..........................................................72 MEMORY .......................................................................42 Movie program................................................................64 Music program ................................................................64 My Beam.........................................................................61 ■ A AC power supply cable ................................................... 29 Audio pin cable............................................................... 20 AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam).......................................... 35 ■ B Battery............................................................................. 30 BEAM MENU ................................................................ 74 Beam mode ......................................................... 54, 60, 61 ■ C ■ N Night listening enhancer .................................................67 ■ O On-screen display (OSD) ................................................32 Optical cable ...................................................................20 OSD video pin cable .......................................................20 Cable clamp .................................................................... 20 Cardboard microphone stand .......................................... 37 CINEMA DSP ................................................................ 64 ■ P ■ D ■ R DEMO MODE................................................................ 91 Demonstration DVD ......................................................... 6 Digital audio pin cable.................................................... 20 DISPLAY MENU ........................................................... 83 Dolby Digital .................................................................. 56 Dolby Pro Logic.............................................................. 56 Dolby Pro Logic II.......................................................... 56 DTS................................................................................. 56 DTS Neo: 6 ..................................................................... 56 Dynamic range................................................................ 79 Rear panel .........................................................................9 Remote control ................................................................10 Remote control code .......................................................96 Remote control sensor.....................................................30 ■ E EUPHONY ................................................................... 105 ■ F FACTORY PRESET ....................................................... 94 Fastener........................................................................... 18 Front panel ........................................................................ 7 Front panel display ........................................................... 8 ■ H HDMI.............................................................................. 20 HDMI cable .................................................................... 20 IntelliBeam ..................................................................... 35 IntelliBeam microphone ................................................. 36 ■ S SET MENU.....................................................................32 Sleep timer ......................................................................68 Sound field program........................................................63 Stereo plus 3 Beam .........................................................55 Surround mode ................................................................56 Surround sound ...............................................................54 SOUND MENU ..............................................................78 Sports program ................................................................64 Stereo sound ....................................................................60 System parameter............................................................88 ■ T Test tone ..........................................................................84 TruBass............................................................................79 TV macro ......................................................................100 TV volume equal mode...................................................67 ■ V Volume ............................................................................47 Volume mode ..................................................................67 ■ L LFE 0.1-channel ........................................................... 106 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ I PCM ..............................................................................106 Power...............................................................................31 English 107 En Specifications Specifications AMP SECTION FM SECTION • Maximum Output Power (JEITA) ................................................. 2 W (1 kHz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 21 20 W (100 Hz, 10% THD, 4 Ω) × 2 • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia model] ............................. 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz SPEAKER SECTION • Driver Small dia. speakers ...................... 4 cm (1-9/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 21 Woofers .................... 10 cm (3-15/16 in) cone magnetic shielding type × 2 Frequency response ............................................. 60 Hz to 20 kHz (-10 dB, stereo mode) CONNECTIONS • Input Jacks TV/STB, AUX 1 AUDIO IN (1 V, 32 kΩ) ........... 2 pairs (Analog) TV/STB, AUX 1 OPTICAL DIGITAL IN ........ 2 (Optical digital) DVD, AUX 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL IN ............2 (Coaxial digital) AUX 1, DVD HDMI IN ............................................................... 2 AUX 3 .......................................................................................... 1 • Output Jacks SUBWOOFER OUT (1.5 V, less than 120 Hz) ...... 1 (Subwoofer) VIDEO OUT (1 Vp-p, 75 Ω) ............................................1 (OSD) HDMI OUT .................................................................................. 1 • System Connector Jack INTELLIBEAM MIC ..................................1 (Microphone input) HDMI interface of this unit is based on the following standard: • HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. 108 En GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] .................................. AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] .................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Korea model] ....................................... AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz [General model] .................................... AC 110–120 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] ..........................................AC 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption .................................................................. 32 W • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.5 W or less • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................ 800 × 155 × 152 mm (31-1/2 x 6-3/32 x 5-31/32 in) • Weight .............................................................. 11.5 kg (25 lbs 6 oz) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. List of remote control codes TV ADMIRAL 292, 293, 216 AIWA 294, 276, 283, 284 AKAI 295, 296 ALBA 296 AOC 297 BELL & HOWELL 292 BESTAR 298 BLAUPUNKT 229, 222 BLUE SKY 298 BRANDT 223 BROC SONIC 297 BUSH 296 BYD:SIGN 201, 202 CLATRONIC 298 CRAIG 224 CROSLEX 225, 298 CURTIS MATHIS 297, 226 DAEWOO 297, 298, 224, 227, 228 DAYTRON 239 DUAL 298 DWIN 293, 281 EMERSON 297, 224, 239, 232 FURGUSON 223, 265, 266 FIRST LINE 298 FISHER 295, 233 FRABA 298 FUJITSU 289 FUNAI 277, 278 GE 293, 297, 234, 235, 236 GOODMANS 296, 298, 223 GRUNDIG 229, 238, 249 HITACHI 297, 239, 242, 243, 285, 206 ICE 296 IRRADIO 296 ITT/NOKIA 244, 245 JC PENNY 293, 297, 234, 237 JVC 296, 246, 247, 286 KENDO 298 KTV 297, 239 LG/GOLDSTAR 297, 298, 239, 237 LOEWE 298, 248, 207 LXI 293, 297, 225, 226, 233, 298 MAGNAVOX 297, 225, 239, 298 MARANTZ 298, 210 MATSUI 295 MEDION 203, 204, 298 MEMOREX 297, 216 MITSUBISHI 299, 297, 259, 287 NAD 226, 255 NEC 297, 252, 282 NOKIA 244, 245 NOKIA OCEANIC 245 NORDMENDE 265, 266 ONWA 296 PANASONIC 234, 235, 236, 253, 288, 211 PHILCO 297, 225, 239, 298 PHILIPS 298, 225, 205 PIONEER 226, 235, 254, 255, 268 PORTLAND 297, 256 PROSCAN 293, 221 PROSCAN 231, 241, 251 PROTON 297, 250, 260, 270 QUASAR 234, 235 RADIO SHACK299, 293, 297 RCA 293, 297, 234, 256, 257, 258, 221 RUNCO 220, 230, 271 SABA 223, 269, 265, 266 SAMPO 281, 297, 280 SAMSUNG 297, 239, 248, 262, 275 SANYO 295, 233, 279, 272, 273, 274, 212 SCHNEIDER 296 SCOTT 297 SHARP 292, 239, 232, 213, 208 SIEMENS 229 SIGNATURE 216 SIGNATURE 292 SONY 263, 214 SYLVANIA 297, 225, 298 SYNPHONIC 217, 218, 219 TELEFUNKUN 269, 264, 265, 266 THOMSON 223, 266 TOSHIBA 292, 226, 267, 215 VIDECH 297, 242 WARDS 297, 239, 232, 216 YAMAHA 299, 292, 242, 285, 287, 253, 206 YAMAJI 298 ZENITH 216, 261, 271 DVD PLAYER AIWA 648, 649 APEX DIGITAL 652, 653, 654 BYD:SIGN 678, 679 DAEWOO 655 DENON 623, 624, 682 FUNAI 625 HARMAN/KARDON 656, 657 HITACHI 626, 688, 689 JVC 627, 643, 692 KENWOOD 628 KLH 658 LG/GOLDSTAR 645, 663, 664 MARANTZ 699, 659 MITSUBISHI 629 ONKYO 632, 633, 634 PANASONIC 623, 635, 668, 672, 682, 683, 684 PHILIPS 699, 647, 659 PIONEER 636, 637, 638, 673, 674, 675, 685 686, 687 RCA 639 SAMSUNG 642 SHARP 643, 692 SONY 644, 676, 677 SYLVANIA 662 SYMPHONIC 662 THOMSON 646 TOSHIBA 634, 665, 666, 667 YAMAHA 699, 622, 623, 647, 682 ZERITH 663, 664 VCR ADMIRAL 395 AIWA 396, 397, 398, 329 AKAI 322, 323, 324 AUDIO DYNAMIC 392, 394 BELL & HOWELL 393 BLAUPUNKT 325, 326 BROC SONIC 327 BUSH 322 CANON 325, 328 CGM 396, 332 CITIZEN 396 CRAIG 396, 363 CURTHIS MATHIS 397, 328, 333 DAEWOO 328, 334, 335 DBX 392, 394 DIMENSIA 333 DYNATECH 397 EMERSON 327, 334, 396, 397 FISHER 393, 336 FUNAI 397 GE 328, 333, 387 GO VIDEO 321, 331, 341, 351, 363 GOODMANS 334, 337 GRUNDIG 332, 338 HITACHI 325, 333, 349, 342, 343 INSTANT REPLAY 325, 328 ITT/NOKIA 393 JC PENNY 392, 393, 394, 328, 333, 349, 396, 363 JVC 392, 394, 344, 345, 346, 347 KENDO 396 KENWOOD 392, 394, 396 LG/GOLDSTAR 396, 388 LOEWE 396, 337 LUXOR 395 LXI 393, 396, 397, 336, 349 MAGNAVOX 325, 326, 328 MARANTZ 392, 394 MARTA 396 MATSUI 396 MEMOREX 328, 336, 396, 397 MINOLTA 333, 349 MITSUBISHI 399, 344, 348, 359, 353, 352 MTC 363, 397 MULTITECH 397, 348, 354 NEC 392, 394, 344, 383 NOKIA 393, 395 NOKIA OCEANIC 395 OKANO 323 OLYMPIC 325, 328 ORION 327 PANASONIC 325, 328, 339, 355, 378, 384, 385, 386 PENTAX 333, 349 PHILCO 325, 328, 397 PHILLIPS 325, 326, 328, 337, 356, 357 PHONOLA 337 PILOT 396 PIONEER 325 QUASAR 325, 328 RCA/PROSCAN 325, 326, 328, 333, 335, 349, 358, 363, 397 REALISTIC 393, 397, 328, 336, 359, 362, 396, 363 SAMSUNG 354, 358, 363, 364, 365, 366 SANSUI 394 SANYO 393, 336, 367 SCHNEIDER 337 SCOTT 399, 335, 336, 348, 359, 354, 358, 352 SELECO 322 SHARP 395, 362, 382 SIEMENS 393 SIGNATURE 2000 395, 397 SONY 368, 379, 372, 373, 374, 375 SYLVANIA 397, 325, 326, 328 SYMPHONIC 397 TANDBERG 334 TANDY 397 TASHIRO 396 TATUNG 392, 394 TEAC 392, 394, 397 TECHNICS 325, 328 TEKNIKA 396 TELEFUNKUN 376, 377 THOMAS 397 THORN 393, 396 TOSHIBA 335, 389 TOTEVISION 363, 396 UNITECH 363 UNIVERSUM 396, 327, 376 VIDEOSONIC 363 W.WHOUSE 396 WARDS 395, 396, 336, 362, 397, 363 YAMAHA 399, 392, 393, 394 ZERITH 344, 361, 368, 371, 379, 396, 397 CABLE TV TUNER ABC 739, 752, 753, 755, 758, 759, 762 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 722, 786, 787, 788 HAMIN 723, 724, 725, 726, 727 HITACHI 722 JEROLD 722, 728, 729, 732, 733, 734, 735, 736, 737 MAGNAVOX 738 MOTOROLA 748, 728 OAK 739, 742, 743 PANASONIC 744, 745, 746, 747, 783, 784 PHILLIPS 763, 764, 765, 766, 767, 768 PIONEER 748, 785, 747 RADIO SHACK749 i RCA 744, 792, 793 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 752, 753, 754, 789 SONY 756, 757 TOCOM 755 UNIVERSAL 769, 772, 773, 774, 775 VIEWSTAR 764, 766, 776, 777, 778, 779, 782 SATELLITE TUNER ECHOSTAR 822 GE 837, 838, 839 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 823 HITACHI 824 HUGHES 843, 844, 845, 846 JVC 822 MAGNAVOX 825 PANASONIC 826, 829 PHILLIPS 825, 843, 844, 845, 846, 847, 848, 849 PRIMESTAR 827 PROSCAN 837, 838, 839, 842 RADIO SHACK 828 RCA 837, 838, 839, 842 SAMSUNG 852 SKY+ 853 SKY HD 853 SONY 832, 835 TOSHIBA 833, 836 UNIDEN 825 ZENITH 834 ii 00cv_YSP-3000_UA.fm Page 1 Friday, March 7, 2008 10:45 AM UA YSP-3000 YSP-3000 Digital Sound ProjectorTM © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WK75380-2 UA YSP-3000 Digital Sound ProjectorTM Reference Guide for iPodTM/XM Radio Overview This is the Reference Guide for Yamaha YSP-3000 Digital Sound Projector. This guide explains the connections and operations of iPod and XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only). Operations in this guide use keys on the supplied remote control unless otherwise specified. For general information including the controls and functions of this unit, refer to the owner’s manual. y The illustrations used in this Reference Guide are for U.S.A. and Canada models only. iPodTM “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. Contents Using iPod™........................................................................................................................................ 2 Connection................................................................................................................................................. 2 Controlling iPod™ ....................................................................................................................................2 XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only).................................................... 5 Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............................................................................................. 5 Activating XM™ Satellite Radio .............................................................................................................. 6 Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations .................................................................................................... 6 Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels .......................................................................................... 9 Displaying the XM™ Satellite Radio information.................................................................................. 10 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................ 11 USING IPOD™ Using iPod™ This unit has the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately). Station your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock, and use the supplied remote control to operate your iPod. Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. • The photos and video clips stored on your iPod are not displayed on your TV monitor. Connection Controlling iPod™ Connect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit using a dedicated cable. STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV CAUTION TV DOCK DVD Do not connect this unit or other components to the main power until all connections between components are complete. AUX1 AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO STB OFF 0 TV SUR. DECODE +10 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU Rear panel of this unit 1 ANTENNA AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO 2 DOCK 3 TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME CH MUTE TV INPUT CH LEVEL TEST 4 5 6 TV VOL AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER TV MUTE CODE SET 7 8 9 0 Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) A y When your iPod and external component using the AUX 3 input jack are connected to this unit at the same time, and when the DOCK indicator is lit in the front panel display, iPod output takes priority. (U.S.A. and Canada models) 1 Navigate through the iPod menu ( / / / ) and starts playback (ENTER). 2 Displays the OSD (on-screen menu) menu. 3 Selects AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or AUX3 (Australia model) as the input source. 4 Use to return to the previous iPod menu. 5 Sets the operation mode of this unit. 6 Use to return to the previous iPod menu. 7 Stops playback. 8 Pauses playback. 9 Searches forward/backward. 0 Starts playback. A Skips to the beginning of the current/previous/next track. y 8 and 9 toggle between play and pause operations in the Simple Remote mode. 2 En 01EN_YSP-3000_UA-RG.book Page 3 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:38 AM Using iPod™ y • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “Troubleshooting” on page 11. • While your iPod is stationed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, your iPod battery is automatically charged as long as this unit is turned on. ■ Controlling iPod in the Simple Remote mode ■ Controlling iPod in the Menu Browse mode You can perform some basic operations such as play, pause, stop, backward/forward search, and track skip using the remote control without the aid of the OSD. Such basic operations can be performed also on your iPod. You can perform the advanced operations using the remote control with the aid of the OSD (see the owner’s manual for information on the OSD). In the OSD, you can browse the song list stored on your iPod. Further, you can change or adjust the settings on your iPod as desired. Such advanced operations cannot be performed on your iPod. 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV 1 Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. YSP TV/AV YSP 2 Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears and the DOCK indicator lights up. 2 Lights up Press AUX3/DOCK (U.S.A. and Canada models) or AUX3 (Australia model), and set your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. In the front panel display, “iPod connected” appears and the DOCK indicator lights up. Lights up iPod connected iPod connected y Use # and * on the remote control interchangeably to toggle between play and pause operations. Note Information on the current song appears only in the iPod screen but not in the front panel display of this unit. 3 Press DISPLAY, and display the menu browse mode. The OSD appears on your TV. iPod DISPLAY Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings Top > > > > > > > English 3 En Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI Using iPod™ y 4 Press / and / to navigate through the iPod menu, and press ENTER to start playback of the selected song. ENTER and ENTER • Press RETURN or MENU to go back to the previous menu. • The information on the current song also appears in the front panel display. You can set the front panel display mode: CONT. or ONCE. For details, see “SCROLL” (Front panel display scroll) in “F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in the owner’s manual (see page 83). • You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual (see page 83). Notes ENTER Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat • The YAMAHA logo appears in the iPod screen in this mode. • Undisplayable characters are shown as underscores “_” in the front panel display and OSD. • You can change or adjust the “Settings” parameters only in the OSD. ■ An example of the information display during playback 7 1 iPod[Play] S R 1/9 2 3 4 FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia 5 6 ||||||||;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 8 9 Settings parameters: Shuffle Shuffle Use this function for random playback of songs or albums. When “Songs” or “Albums” is chosen, “S” appears in the top right corner while the songs or albums are being shuffled. Press ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the choices. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this function. • Select “Songs” for random playback of songs. • Select “Albums” for random playback of albums. Repeat Repeat Use this function for repeated playback of a song or a sequence of songs. When “One” or “All” is chosen, “R” appears in the top right corner while a song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. Press ENTER repeatedly to toggle between the choices. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this function. • Select “One” for repeated playback of a song. • Select “All” for repeated playback of a sequence of songs. 4 En 1 Track number/total tracks 2 Name of the artist 3 Name of the album 4 Name of the song 5 Progress bar 6 Elapsed time 7 Shuffle and repeat icons 8 (playback), (pausing), and (search backward) 9 Remaining time (search forward), XM™ SATELLITE RADIO TUNING (U.S.A. AND CANADA MODELS ONLY) XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ■ About XM Satellite Radio XM Satellite Radio offers an extraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast in superior digital audio from coast to coast. From rock to reggae, from classical to hip hop, XM has something for every music fan. XM’s dedication to playing the richest selection of music is matched by its passion for live sporting events, talk radio, up-to-the-minute news, stand-up comedy, children’s programming, and much more. XM READY Legal Disclaimer Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (US residents) and 1-877-GET-XMSR (Canadian residents). For a full listing of the XM commercial-free channels and advertising-supported channels, visit lineup.xmradio.com (US residents) or www.xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com (US residents) and xmradio.ca (Canadian residents). Service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2007 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. y This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder that plays back the XM HD surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. See “Surround modes and recommended sources” in the owner’s manual (see page 56). Note The XM Satellite Radio service is unavailable in Alaska and Hawaii. Connecting XM™ Mini-Tuner Home Dock Connect XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (each sold separately by XM Satellite Radio) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For information on your XM MiniTuner and Home Dock, see the operating instructions provided with XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (each sold separately) y • To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the antenna of Home Dock must be placed at or near a southfacing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. • Use the “XM ANTENNA LEVEL” parameter in “MANUAL SETUP” (see page 82 in the owner’s manual) to display the XM Satellite Radio reception level (%) in the OSD. For the best reception, adjust the orientation of the connected indoor antenna of the Home Dock to obtain a value of 60% or more. Note If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, Home Dock may not be connected properly to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD COAXIAL OPTICAL TV/STB XM IR IN English AUX1 Rear panel of this unit 5 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Activating XM™ Satellite Radio Once you have installed XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted XM Mini-Tuner, connected Home Dock to your XM READY home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight-character XM Radio ID: on XM Mini-Tuner, on XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0 (see “All Channel Search mode” on page 7). Record the XM Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference. Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations STANDBY/ON POWER POWER AV TV DOCK DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 AUX3 TV INPUT1 MACRO FM/XM PRESET/TUNE SEARCH CAT MEMORY AUTO VOL MODE SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP Note The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S”, or “F”. Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://www.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-9672346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM READY home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full channel lineup on your XM READY home audio system, you are done. For more information or to subscribe in Canada, visit XM on the Web at http://www.xmradio.ca/ or call XM’s Listener Care at 1-877GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677). 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 MUSIC MOVIE SPORTS 7 8 OFF 9 SUR. DECODE +10 0 ENHANCER ENTRY CAT/ A-E ENTER MENU TV/AV YSP DISPLAY RETURN VOLUME 1 3BEAM CH TV VOL Set the operation mode selector to TV/AV. TV/AV YSP 2 Press FM/XM repeatedly to select XM as the input source. In the front panel display, the XM indicator lights up and the XM Satellite Radio information (channel number/channel name, channel category, and artist name/song or program title) for the currently selected channel appears. FM/XM Lights up [001] Preview y • You can also press INPUT on the front panel repeatedly to select XM as the input source. • When XM is selected as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously chosen channel. 6 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ■ Category Search mode 3 Search for a desired channel by using one of the four XM Satellite Radio search modes: • To select a channel from all channels, see “All Channel Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel by channel category, see “Category Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” on page 8. • To select a channel by directly entering the channel number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 8. 1 SEARCH y CAT SEARCH • You can preset the XM Satellite Radio channels (see page 9). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display and/or in the OSD (see page 10). ■ All Channel Search mode 1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. 2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change the XM channel category. Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. CAT/ A-E ENTER SEARCH 3 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search for an XM channel within the selected channel category. ALL CH SEARCH ENTRY ENTER 2 Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to search for an XM channel within all channels. ENTRY y ENTER Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search. y • Hold down ENTRY ( / ) for quick search. • To change the channel category, press CAT/A-E ( / ). • Select channel “0” to display your XM Radio ID number. English 7 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset the XM channels. For details, see “Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels” on page 9. 1 ■ Direct Number Access mode 1 Press SEARCH repeatedly to select either “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. Press SEARCH repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. SEARCH SEARCH ALL CH SEARCH or PRESET SEARCH CAT SEARCH 2 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). CAT/ A-E 3 ENTER Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). 2 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter the desired three-digit XM channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons 1, 2, and 3. 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 The front panel display changes as follows: ENTRY <XM> --1 ENTER <XM> -12 y You can also use the numeric buttons to directly input the preset channel number. <XM> 123 Notes • To enter a one- or two-digit number, press the corresponding number button(s), and press ENTER to confirm the number. If you do not press ENTER, this unit automatically confirms the entered number after a few seconds. • If you press a button other than the numeric buttons and ENTER during this operation, the Direct Number Access mode is canceled. 8 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Presetting the XM™ Satellite Radio channels 4 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 5 preset channel groups with 8 preset channel numbers each). You can then recall the preset channels easily by selecting the preset group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 8. Press ENTRY ( / ) repeatedly to select a preset number while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset number appears in the front panel display. ENTRY ENTER 1 Search for an XM channel that you want to preset. See “Basic XM™ Satellite Radio operations” on page 6 for details. Flashing [043] XMU Currently selected channel number C8 [043] XMU y The initial factory setting for all preset channels is “[001] Preview”. 2 Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for about 10 seconds. MEMORY Currently selected preset number 5 Press MEMORY or ENTER to assign the preset group and number to the selected XM channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. Flashes MEMORY or Note ENTER Operate steps 3 to 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. 3 Press CAT/A-E ( / ) repeatedly to select a preset group while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset group appears in the front panel display. 8 : (:)[ 0 4 3 ] X M U C Colon Colon (:) CAT/ A-E ENTER Note When you overwrite an existing preset channel, the previously stored XM channel information is cleared and updated. Flashing English C [043] XMU Currently selected preset group 9 En XM™ Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Displaying the XM™ Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (channel number/channel name, channel category, and artist name/song or program title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD. Note If a status or error message appears in the front panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)” in “Troubleshooting” on page 11. y • You can set the front panel display mode: CONT. or ONCE. When ONCE is selected, the front panel display scrolls characters to the end once, after which the first 15 characters appear and stay. See “SCROLL” (Front panel display scroll) in “F.DISPLAY SET” (Front panel display settings) in the owner’s manual (page 83). • Undisplayable characters are displayed as spaces. ■ Displaying the XM channel information in the OSD Press DISPLAY. The following screen is displayed in the OSD. ■ Displaying the XM channel information in the front panel display DISPLAY Press DISPLAY repeatedly to toggle between the following information displays. DISPLAY XM INFORMATION ALL CH SEARCH XM :043 CHAN :XMU CAT :Rock NAME :Coldplay TITLE:Speed of sound .(Coldplay/Spe) [ ]/[ ]:CHANNEL [ ]/[ ]:CATEGORY Channel number / Channel name Channel category y Artist name / Song or program title When the channel number / channel name is displayed: [043] XMU When the channel category is displayed: <CAT>ROCK When the artist name / song title is displayed: Coldplay / Spee 10 En • To turn off the OSD, press DISPLAY again. • You can set the interval for which the OSD screen is displayed after an operation. See “OSD DISPLAY TIME” (OSD display time) in “OSD SET” (OSD settings) in the owner’s manual (page 83). • To hold the XM Satellite Radio OSD information, press ENTER. To unhold, press ENTER again. • This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio OSD information screens for future reference. To view the previous OSD screens, press RETURN repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio OSD information screen is on hold. TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting Refer to the following charts when the status messages appear during your iPod or XM Satellite Radio operations on this unit. If you experience a problem that is not listed below, or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power supply cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error with no status message appearing in the front panel display and in the OSD, check the connection between your iPod and this unit. Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring the song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 2 Try resetting your iPod. — Unknown iPod Your iPod is not supported by this unit. Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — iPod connected The connection between your iPod and this unit is completed. Disconnected Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. Set your iPod back in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. 2 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the files stored on your iPod. Check the playability of the files stored on your iPod. — Store other playable music files on your iPod. — ■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Status message Cause Remedy See page XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock are not connected to the XM jack of this unit or not working properly. Check XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock connections and adjust the orientation for the best reception level. 5 UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. — NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the indoor antenna of Home Dock for the best reception level. 5 LOADING It takes longer than four seconds to decode audio or text data. Wait until the decoding process is finished. — OFF AIR The currently selected XM channel is not broadcasting signals. Check the channel number again or select another XM channel. — <XM> - - - The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer available. - - - No artist name or song title is available. Select another channel category by pressing CAT/A-E repeatedly. 7 / - - - <CAT> - - - No channel is available for the selected category. 11 En English CHECK ANTENNA 01EN_YSP-3000_UA-RG.book Page 12 Friday, March 7, 2008 11:38 AM © 2007 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WK75460-2 Items used for connections and operations in this guide s Audio pin cable (x1) s OSD* video pin cable (x1) s Optical cable (x1) s Digital audio pin cable (x1) s IntelliBeam microphone (x1) s Cardboard microphone stand (x1) s Demonstration DVD (x1) YSP-3000 QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE Connecting external components to this unit Connecting external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit. Connect your TV or DVD player to this unit using appropriate cables as shown below. After all connections are complete, plug the power supply cable into the AC wall outlet. For further information on connecting other components, see pages 19 to 29 in the Owner’s Manual. Connection example 2 *OSD: On-Screen Display This quick reference guide explains steps to connect a TV and a DVD player to this unit and achieve the surround sound effects in a quick, easy manner. For detailed operation, refer to the Owner’s Manual. 1 2 This connection example shows a way to connect external components such as a TV or DVD player to this unit by using the supplied cable. You can enjoy the multi-channel audio from the DVD player and the analog/digital audio from the TV. Use the video pin cable supplied with your DVD player to make a video connection between your DVD player and TV. Connection example 1 Installing this unit TV TV DVD player Install this unit where there are no objects such as furniture obstructing the path of sound beams. Otherwise, the desired surround sound effects may not be achieved. You may install this unit in parallel with the wall or in the corner. Optical cable 1. Pull out the cap VIDEO INPUT Video connection Install this unit in the corner at a 40˚ to 50˚ angle from the adjacent walls. Digital satellite tuner/Cable TV tuner/ Digital airwave tuner DVD player Decide where to install this unit. Install this unit in the exact center of the wall when it is measured from the left and right corners. This connection example shows a way to make the most of the capability of this unit. You can enjoy DVD audio and video with higher quality via the HDMI cable. In case your TV does not have a built-in digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner, connect a digital satellite tuner, cable TV tuner, or digital airwave tuner via the HDMI cable. For details, see “Connections using HDMI cables” on page 21 in the Owner’s manual. OPTICAL AUDIO OUTPUT ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO OUTPUT INPUT L 1 R COAXIAL AUDIO OUTPUT 2. Check the direction Pull out the cap before connecting the optical cable, and then check the direction to insert the cable. HDMI INPUT HDMI OUTPUT HDMI connection 1 2 AUX 1 1 2 (Sold separately) 3 (Sold separately) 2 DVD IN An object, such as furniture An object, such as furniture OUT Front left channel 40˚ to 50˚ 1 Front left channel Center channel Center channel Front right channel Front right channel 2 AUDIO INPUT OUT VIDEO 3 4 DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD YSP-3000 COAXIAL Surround left channel Surround left channel Surround right channel Surround right channel HDMI To the AC wall outlet Subwoofer AUX 1 TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 TV/STB VIDEO Do not plug the power supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. Audio connection OUT AUDIO INPUT DIGITAL INPUT AUX 2 DVD TV/STB SUBWOOFER AUX 1 TV/STB Audio connection They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit. Depending on your installation environment, connections with external components (see “2 Connecting external components to this unit”) can be done before installing this unit. We recommend that you temporarily place and arrange all components in order to decide which procedure must come first. In case you install this unit on top of a rack, etc., use the supplied fasteners to prevent an accidental fall of this unit. For further information on installation, see page 16 in the Owner’s Manual. The following is an example of installing this unit in a rack. To prevent this unit or the floor from being scratched, we recommend putting a piece of cloth on the floor in step 2. 1 Place this unit in front of 2 Place this unit upside 3 Install this unit in the the rack. down and connect this unit to your TV and DVD player. rack. 4 Installation is completed. To the AC wall outlet Subwoofer AUX 1 * The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. Install this unit using a rack, etc. YSP-3000 COAXIAL Do not plug the power supply cable into an AC wall outlet until all connections are complete. * The rear panel illustration shows jacks and their names to help you find them easily. Connect cables in the following order. They are not exactly the same as the ones on the actual rear panel of this unit. Supplied Connect cables in the following order. 1 Audio pin cable (Outputs TV analog audio sounds from this unit) Supplied 2 OSD video pin cable (Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV) 1 OSD video pin cable (Displays the YSP-3000 menu screen on the TV) 3 Optical cable (Outputs TV digital audio sounds from this unit) Sold separately 2 HDMI cable (Displays the DVD digital video on the TV) 3 HDMI cable (Inputs DVD digital audio/video signals to this unit) 4 Digital audio pin cable (Outputs DVD digital audio sounds from this unit) y Hint y Hint Note • To enjoy better surround effects, place this unit on the upper shelf to keep it away from the floor. • You can also use the optional metal wall bracket (sold separately) to mount this unit on the wall. For details, refer to the instructions supplied with the metal wall bracket. Note Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is turned on. If you have connected external components, follow the steps on the backside to start the Continued on the back AUTO SETUP procedure. 0726_YSP-3000_En_guide.p65 C2007 WK75520 [En] 1 Note If you have connected external components, follow the steps on the backside to start the Continued on the back AUTO SETUP procedure. Check whether the digital audio output of your TV and DVD player is turned on. Be careful not to leave scratches on this unit or the rack. Printed in Malaysia If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible TV (except some models) via HDMI, you can use the remote control supplied with your TV to turn on or off the power, select the audio output component, and adjust the volume level of this unit. 7/26/07, 4:06 PM All rights reserved. Continued from the front 3 Carry out the AUTO SETUP (IntelliBeam) Carry out the AUTO SETUP to adjust the settings that best match your listening environment 6 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. The IntelliBeam technology allows you to achieve sound adjustments that best match your listening environment. It is normal for loud test tones to be output during the AUTO SETUP procedure. Make sure that there are no children around in the listening room while the AUTO SETUP procedure is in progress. ENHANCER 1 Connect the supplied IntelliBeam microphone to the INTELLIBEAM MIC jack on the front panel. A-E DISPLAY ENTRY ENTER The following screen appears on the TV. Leave the room within 10 seconds before the AUTO SETUP procedure starts. MENU 2 3 4 ENHANCER YSP ENTRY MENU Will begin in 20sec YSP DISPLAY 7 Press and hold AUTO SETUP for more than 2 seconds. Please leave the room TV/AV ENTER A-E Enjoy TV or DVD digital audio in surround sound. For instructions on how to operate or set your TV or DVD player, refer to the owner’s manual supplied with each component. Enjoying DVDs in surround sound PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E MEMORY FM Cardboard microphone stand (supplied) VOL MODE AUTO SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 **-------[RETURN]:Cancel RETURN 1 Select the TV channel using the remote control supplied with your TV. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. 2 Set the operation mode selector to YSP. The setup screen automatically changes during the AUTO SETUP procedure. When the AUTO SETUP procedure is completed, the following screen appears on the TV. SHOW RESULT This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. [ENTER]:Save set-up [RETURN]:Do not save set-up Please connect the MIC. Please place the MIC at least 1.8m/6ft away from the YSP unit. The MIC should be set at ear level when seated. Measurement takes about 3min. After [ENTER] is pressed, please leave the room. [ENTER]:Start [RETURN]:Cancel IntelliBeam microphone Center height of this unit Place the IntelliBeam microphone on the extended center line of this unit and 1.8 m (6.0 ft) or more away from it. Also, make sure place the IntelliBeam microphone within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit. Upper bound position of the microphone Within 1 m (3.3 ft) Cardboard microphone stand More than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) Within 1 m (3.3 ft) Listening position Lower bound position of the microphone Center line Cardboard microphone stand 8 Check the following points. About the IntelliBeam microphone • Is the microphone placed on an imaginary center line drawn from this unit? • Is the microphone placed within 1 m (3.3 ft) upper or lower from the center height of this unit? • Is the microphone placed more than 1.8 m (6.0 ft) from the front of this unit? About the room environment • Is your listening room kept as quiet as possible? A-E 9 Prepare to leave the room. Subwoofer VOLUME STANDBY/ON POWER POWER TV AV CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT “YSP-3000” appears on your TV. If the OSD video pin cable is connected to the video input 1 on the TV as shown in the connection example, switch the video input to “1”. 3 y Hint • The result may differ depending on the environment. • If any error occurs, the corresponding error message appears on the screen. In this case, see “Error messages for AUTO SETUP” on page 41 in the Owner’s Manual and then follow the instructions. To start the AUTO SETUP procedure once again, press RETURN. 1) Press DVD on the remote control of this unit. AUX1 AUX2 INPUT1 AUX3 TV MIN MAX MIN This unit switches to the DVD playback mode. This unit switches to the TV playback mode. INPUT1 DVD AUX1 STB TV AUX2 INPUT1 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH AUX3 TV 2 PRESET/TUNE SEARCH A-E MACRO MACRO MEMORY FM MEMORY 2) Play back the supplied demonstration DVD on the DVD player. 11 Press ENTER. TV TV STB VOL MODE ENHANCER ENTRY AUTO SETUP INPUTMODE SLEEP 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 3BEAM 1 2 3 4 Check the digital signal being output at this unit. MENU AUTO SETUP COMPLETE TV/AV ENTER A-E YSP Please remove the MIC from the YSP and the listening position. RETURN 12 Disconnect the IntelliBeam microphone. The AUTO SETUP has completed. Keep the IntelliBeam microphone in a safe place. The settings are automatically saved in the system memory. Input channel indicators The input channel indicators (see page 8 in the Owner’s Manual) are lit in the front panel display, and they switch according to the channel composition of the corresponding input source. If the sound is output from your TV speakers, mute the volume on your TV. For details about digital audio input signals, see page 46 in the Owner’s Manual. VOLUME CH TV VOL MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE 5BEAM ST+3BEAM 1 2 3 STEREO MY BEAM MY SUR. 4 5 6 5 Press VOLUME +/- on the remote control to adjust the volume level of this unit. 6 Press one of the beam mode buttons on the remote control to select the desired beam mode. 3BEAM MAX MACRO INTELLIBEAM MIC 0726_YSP-3000_En_guide.p65 RETURN 3 Press TV on the remote control of this unit. Select one of the six beam modes that best matches the current input source of this unit. For further information on the beam modes, see page 54 in the Owner’s Manual. DVD YSP DISPLAY y Hint • When leaving the room, bring this guide with you. • Wait outside the room during the AUTO SETUP procedure. • The AUTO SETUP procedure takes about 3 minutes. • To cancel the AUTO SETUP procedure after it is started, press RETURN. 5 Select the appropriate video input on your TV. RETURN TV/AV ENTER If “ENVIRONMENT CHECK (FAILED) is displayed, see page 40 in the Owner’s Manual and then run the procedure again. DISPLAY The power of this unit turns on. Before operations, insert batteries into the remote control (see page 30 in the Owner’s Manual). If necessary, adjust the volume level of this unit. If you have connected the subwoofer, set the volume and crossover/high cut frequency. Refer to the hint on page 36 in the Owner’s Manual. A-E YSP DISPLAY IntelliBeam microphone 4 Turn on the power of your TV. TV/AV ENTER The following screen appears on the TV for 2 seconds and then the menu screen disappears from the TV. The best setting may not be done if you are in the room. Prepare to leave the room in 10 seconds after pressing ENTER in step 10. 3 Press STANDBY/ON on the remote control. This unit switches to the YSP operation mode. BEAM MODE :5 BEAM SUBWOOFER :NOT APPLICABLE AUTO SETUP PREPARATION & CHECK 2 Set the IntelliBeam microphone at your normal listening position. Use the supplied cardboard microphone stand or a tripod to place the IntelliBeam microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated. Enjoying TV in surround sound 1 Select the DVD video input on your TV. MEASUREMENT COMPLETE IntelliBeam microphone (supplied) Enjoying surround sound AUTO SETUP START RETURN The menu screen appears on the TV. If the menu screen does not appear, check the OSD video pin cable (see the connection example on the front page). INTELLIBEAM MIC 4 TV/AV You may want to use the supplied cardboard microphone stand for the AUTO SETUP. Assemble the stand and place the IntelliBeam microphone on top of it as shown below. 1 10 Press ENTER to start the AUTO SETUP procedure, and then leave the room within 10 seconds. 7/26/07, 4:06 PM To fine-tune the listening environment parameters manually or make advanced settings for speaker positions, sound beams, etc., see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 72 in the Owner’s Manual.-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptor
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
en otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Le manuel du propriétaire
- italiano: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Manuale del proprietario
- English: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Owner's manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Bedienungsanleitung
- русский: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Инструкция по применению
- Nederlands: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 de handleiding
- português: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Brugervejledning
- polski: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 El kitabı
- suomi: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Omistajan opas
- română: Yamaha Digital Sound Projector YSP-3000 Manualul proprietarului
Artículos relacionados
-
Yamaha YSP-900 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha YSP-500 Manual de usuario
-
Yamaha YRS-1100 El manual del propietario
-
-
-
Yamaha YSP-1100 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha YRS-2000 El manual del propietario
-
-
-